Add support for ARC instruction relaxation in the assembler.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
239 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
240 [@b{--statistics}]
241 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
242 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
243 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
244 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
249 @c Add an empty line for separation.
250 @ifset AARCH64
251
252 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
253 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
254 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
255 @end ifset
256 @ifset ALPHA
257
258 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
259 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
260 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
261 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
262 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
263 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
264 @end ifset
265 @ifset ARC
266
267 @emph{Target ARC options:}
268 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
269 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
270 [@b{-mcode-density}]
271 [@b{-mrelax}]
272 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
273 @end ifset
274 @ifset ARM
275
276 @emph{Target ARM options:}
277 @c Don't document the deprecated options
278 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
279 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
280 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
281 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
282 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
283 [@b{-mthumb}]
284 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
285 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
286 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
287 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
288 @end ifset
289 @ifset Blackfin
290
291 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
292 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
293 [@b{-mfdpic}]
294 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
295 [@b{-mnopic}]
296 @end ifset
297 @ifset CRIS
298
299 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
300 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
301 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
302 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
303 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
304 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
305 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
306 @end ifset
307 @ifset D10V
308
309 @emph{Target D10V options:}
310 [@b{-O}]
311 @end ifset
312 @ifset D30V
313
314 @emph{Target D30V options:}
315 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
316 @end ifset
317 @ifset EPIPHANY
318
319 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
320 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
321 @end ifset
322 @ifset H8
323
324 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
325 [-h-tick-hex]
326 @end ifset
327 @ifset HPPA
328 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I80386
331
332 @emph{Target i386 options:}
333 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
334 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
335 @end ifset
336 @ifset I960
337
338 @emph{Target i960 options:}
339 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
340 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
341 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
342 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
343 @end ifset
344 @ifset IA64
345
346 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
347 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
348 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
349 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
350 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
351 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
352 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
353 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
354 @end ifset
355 @ifset IP2K
356
357 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
358 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
359 @end ifset
360 @ifset M32C
361
362 @emph{Target M32C options:}
363 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M32R
366
367 @emph{Target M32R options:}
368 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
369 @b{--W[n]p}]
370 @end ifset
371 @ifset M680X0
372
373 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
374 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
375 @end ifset
376 @ifset M68HC11
377
378 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
379 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
380 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
381 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
382 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
383 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
384 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset MCORE
387
388 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
389 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
390 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
391 @end ifset
392 @ifset METAG
393
394 @emph{Target Meta options:}
395 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
396 @end ifset
397 @ifset MICROBLAZE
398 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
399 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MIPS
402
403 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
404 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
405 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
406 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
407 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
408 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
409 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
410 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
411 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
412 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
413 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
414 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
415 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
416 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
417 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
418 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
419 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
420 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
421 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
422 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
423 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
424 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
425 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
426 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
427 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
428 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
429 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
430 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
431 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
432 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
433 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
434 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset MMIX
437
438 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
439 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
440 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
441 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
442 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NIOSII
445
446 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
447 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
448 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
449 @end ifset
450 @ifset NDS32
451
452 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
453 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
454 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
456 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
457 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
458 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
459 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
460 [@b{-mb2bb}]
461 @end ifset
462 @ifset PDP11
463
464 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
465 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
466 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
467 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
468 @end ifset
469 @ifset PJ
470
471 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
472 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PPC
475
476 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
477 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
478 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
479 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
480 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
481 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
482 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
483 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
484 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
485 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
486 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
487 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
488 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
489 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
490 @end ifset
491 @ifset RL78
492
493 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
494 [@b{-mg10}]
495 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset RX
498
499 @emph{Target RX options:}
500 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
501 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
502 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
503 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
504 [@b{-mpid}]
505 [@b{-mrelax}]
506 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
507 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset S390
510
511 @emph{Target s390 options:}
512 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
513 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
514 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
515 @end ifset
516 @ifset SCORE
517
518 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
519 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
520 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
521 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
522 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
523 @end ifset
524 @ifset SPARC
525
526 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
527 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
528 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
529 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
530 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
531 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
532 @end ifset
533 @ifset TIC54X
534
535 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
536 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
537 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TIC6X
540
541 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
542 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
543 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
544 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
545 @end ifset
546 @ifset TILEGX
547
548 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
549 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
550 @end ifset
551 @ifset TILEPRO
552 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
553 @end ifset
554 @ifset VISIUM
555
556 @emph{Target Visium options:}
557 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
558 @end ifset
559 @ifset XTENSA
560
561 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
562 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
563 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
564 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
565 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
566 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
567 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
568 @end ifset
569 @ifset Z80
570
571 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
572 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
573 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
574 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
575 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
576 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
577 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
578 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
579 @end ifset
580 @ifset Z8000
581
582 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
583 @end ifset
584
585 @c man end
586 @end smallexample
587
588 @c man begin OPTIONS
589
590 @table @gcctabopt
591 @include at-file.texi
592
593 @item -a[cdghlmns]
594 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
595
596 @table @gcctabopt
597 @item -ac
598 omit false conditionals
599
600 @item -ad
601 omit debugging directives
602
603 @item -ag
604 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
605
606 @item -ah
607 include high-level source
608
609 @item -al
610 include assembly
611
612 @item -am
613 include macro expansions
614
615 @item -an
616 omit forms processing
617
618 @item -as
619 include symbols
620
621 @item =file
622 set the name of the listing file
623 @end table
624
625 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
626 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
627 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
628
629 @item --alternate
630 Begin in alternate macro mode.
631 @ifclear man
632 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
633 @end ifclear
634
635 @item --compress-debug-sections
636 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
637 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
638 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
639 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
640
641 @ifset ELF
642 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
643 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
644 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
645 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
646 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
647 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
648 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
649 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
650 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
651 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
652 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
653 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
654 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
655 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
656 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
657
658 @end ifset
659
660 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
661 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
662 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
663 override this.
664
665 @item -D
666 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
667 other assemblers.
668
669 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
670 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
671 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
672
673 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
674 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
675 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
676 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
677 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
678 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
679
680 @item -f
681 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
682 compiler output).
683
684 @item -g
685 @itemx --gen-debug
686 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
687 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
688 ECOFF or DWARF2.
689
690 @item --gstabs
691 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
692 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
693
694 @item --gstabs+
695 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
696 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
697 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
698 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
699 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
700
701 @item --gdwarf-2
702 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
703 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
704 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
705
706 @item --gdwarf-sections
707 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
708 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
709 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
710 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
711 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
712 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
713 suffix.
714
715 @item --size-check=error
716 @itemx --size-check=warning
717 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
718
719 @item --help
720 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
721
722 @item --target-help
723 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
724
725 @item -I @var{dir}
726 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
727
728 @item -J
729 Don't warn about signed overflow.
730
731 @item -K
732 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
733 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
734 @end ifclear
735 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
736 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
737 @end ifset
738
739 @item -L
740 @itemx --keep-locals
741 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
742 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
743 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
744 @ifclear man
745 @xref{Symbol Names}.
746 @end ifclear
747
748 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
749 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
750 listing to @var{number}.
751
752 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
753 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
754 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
755
756 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
757 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
758 @var{number} bytes.
759
760 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
761 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
762 to @var{number} + 1.
763
764 @item -o @var{objfile}
765 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
766
767 @item -R
768 Fold the data section into the text section.
769
770 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
771 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
772 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
773 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
774 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
775 requirements at the expense of speed.
776
777 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
778 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
779 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
780 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
781
782 @ifset ELF
783 @item --sectname-subst
784 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
785 @ifclear man
786 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
787 @end ifclear
788 @end ifset
789
790 @item --statistics
791 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
792 assembly.
793
794 @item --strip-local-absolute
795 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
796
797 @item -v
798 @itemx -version
799 Print the @command{as} version.
800
801 @item --version
802 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
803
804 @item -W
805 @itemx --no-warn
806 Suppress warning messages.
807
808 @item --fatal-warnings
809 Treat warnings as errors.
810
811 @item --warn
812 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
813
814 @item -w
815 Ignored.
816
817 @item -x
818 Ignored.
819
820 @item -Z
821 Generate an object file even after errors.
822
823 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
824 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
825
826 @end table
827 @c man end
828
829 @ifset AARCH64
830
831 @ifclear man
832 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
833 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
834 @end ifclear
835
836 @ifset man
837 @c man begin OPTIONS
838 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
839 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
840 @c man end
841 @c man begin INCLUDE
842 @include c-aarch64.texi
843 @c ended inside the included file
844 @end ifset
845
846 @end ifset
847
848 @ifset ALPHA
849
850 @ifclear man
851 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
852 for an Alpha processor.
853 @end ifclear
854
855 @ifset man
856 @c man begin OPTIONS
857 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
858 processor.
859 @c man end
860 @c man begin INCLUDE
861 @include c-alpha.texi
862 @c ended inside the included file
863 @end ifset
864
865 @end ifset
866
867 @c man begin OPTIONS
868 @ifset ARC
869 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
870 processor.
871
872 @table @gcctabopt
873 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
874 This option selects the core processor variant.
875 @item -EB | -EL
876 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
877 @item -mcode-density
878 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
879 @end table
880 @end ifset
881
882 @ifset ARM
883 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
884 processor family.
885
886 @table @gcctabopt
887 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
888 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
889 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
890 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
891 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
892 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
893 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
894 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
895 @item -mthumb
896 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
897 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
898 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
899 @item -EB | -EL
900 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
901 @item -mthumb-interwork
902 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
903 ARM code in mind.
904 @item -mccs
905 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
906 @item -k
907 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
908 @end table
909 @end ifset
910 @c man end
911
912 @ifset Blackfin
913
914 @ifclear man
915 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
916 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
917 @end ifclear
918
919 @ifset man
920 @c man begin OPTIONS
921 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
922 the Blackfin processor family.
923 @c man end
924 @c man begin INCLUDE
925 @include c-bfin.texi
926 @c ended inside the included file
927 @end ifset
928
929 @end ifset
930
931 @c man begin OPTIONS
932 @ifset CRIS
933 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
934 @end ifset
935
936 @ifset D10V
937 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
938 a D10V processor.
939 @table @gcctabopt
940 @cindex D10V optimization
941 @cindex optimization, D10V
942 @item -O
943 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
944 @end table
945 @end ifset
946
947 @ifset D30V
948 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
949 processor.
950 @table @gcctabopt
951 @cindex D30V optimization
952 @cindex optimization, D30V
953 @item -O
954 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
955
956 @cindex D30V nops
957 @item -n
958 Warn when nops are generated.
959
960 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
961 @item -N
962 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
963 @end table
964 @end ifset
965 @c man end
966
967 @ifset EPIPHANY
968 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
969 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
970
971 @ifclear man
972 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
973 configured for an Epiphany processor.
974 @end ifclear
975
976 @ifset man
977 @c man begin OPTIONS
978 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
979 an Epiphany processor.
980 @c man end
981 @c man begin INCLUDE
982 @include c-epiphany.texi
983 @c ended inside the included file
984 @end ifset
985
986 @end ifset
987
988 @ifset H8300
989
990 @ifclear man
991 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
992 for an H8/300 processor.
993 @end ifclear
994
995 @ifset man
996 @c man begin OPTIONS
997 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
998 processor.
999 @c man end
1000 @c man begin INCLUDE
1001 @include c-h8300.texi
1002 @c ended inside the included file
1003 @end ifset
1004
1005 @end ifset
1006
1007 @ifset I80386
1008
1009 @ifclear man
1010 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1011 configured for an i386 processor.
1012 @end ifclear
1013
1014 @ifset man
1015 @c man begin OPTIONS
1016 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1017 an i386 processor.
1018 @c man end
1019 @c man begin INCLUDE
1020 @include c-i386.texi
1021 @c ended inside the included file
1022 @end ifset
1023
1024 @end ifset
1025
1026 @c man begin OPTIONS
1027 @ifset I960
1028 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1029 Intel 80960 processor.
1030
1031 @table @gcctabopt
1032 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1033 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1034
1035 @item -b
1036 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1037
1038 @item -no-relax
1039 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1040 error if necessary.
1041
1042 @end table
1043 @end ifset
1044
1045 @ifset IP2K
1046 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1047 Ubicom IP2K series.
1048
1049 @table @gcctabopt
1050
1051 @item -mip2022ext
1052 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1053
1054 @item -mip2022
1055 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1056 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1057
1058 @end table
1059 @end ifset
1060
1061 @ifset M32C
1062 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1063 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1064
1065 @table @gcctabopt
1066
1067 @item -m32c
1068 Assemble M32C instructions.
1069
1070 @item -m16c
1071 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1072
1073 @item -relax
1074 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1075
1076 @item -h-tick-hex
1077 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1078
1079 @end table
1080 @end ifset
1081
1082 @ifset M32R
1083 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1084 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1085
1086 @table @gcctabopt
1087
1088 @item --m32rx
1089 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1090 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1091
1092 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1093 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1094 encountered.
1095
1096 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1097 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1098 encountered.
1099
1100 @end table
1101 @end ifset
1102
1103 @ifset M680X0
1104 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1105 Motorola 68000 series.
1106
1107 @table @gcctabopt
1108
1109 @item -l
1110 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1111
1112 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1113 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1114 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1115 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1116 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1117
1118 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1119 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1120 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1121 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1122 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1123 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1124
1125 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1126 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1127 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1128
1129 @end table
1130 @end ifset
1131
1132 @ifset NIOSII
1133
1134 @ifclear man
1135 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1136 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1137 @end ifclear
1138
1139 @ifset man
1140 @c man begin OPTIONS
1141 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1142 Altera Nios II processor.
1143 @c man end
1144 @c man begin INCLUDE
1145 @include c-nios2.texi
1146 @c ended inside the included file
1147 @end ifset
1148 @end ifset
1149
1150 @ifset PDP11
1151
1152 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1153 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1154
1155 @table @gcctabopt
1156 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1157 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1158 default is @option{-mpic}.
1159
1160 @item -mall
1161 @itemx -mall-extensions
1162 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1163
1164 @item -mno-extensions
1165 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1166
1167 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1168 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1169
1170 @item -m@var{cpu}
1171 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1172 disable all other extensions.
1173
1174 @item -m@var{machine}
1175 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1176 model, and disable all other extensions.
1177 @end table
1178
1179 @end ifset
1180
1181 @ifset PJ
1182 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1183 a picoJava processor.
1184
1185 @table @gcctabopt
1186
1187 @cindex PJ endianness
1188 @cindex endianness, PJ
1189 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1190 @item -mb
1191 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1192
1193 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1194 @item -ml
1195 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1196
1197 @end table
1198 @end ifset
1199
1200 @ifset M68HC11
1201 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1202 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1203
1204 @table @gcctabopt
1205
1206 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1207 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1208 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1209
1210 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1211 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1212 XGATE address space.
1213
1214 @item -mshort
1215 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1216
1217 @item -mlong
1218 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1219
1220 @item -mshort-double
1221 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1222
1223 @item -mlong-double
1224 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1225
1226 @item --force-long-branches
1227 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1228 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1229 sub routine.
1230
1231 @item -S | --short-branches
1232 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1233 when the offset is out of range.
1234
1235 @item --strict-direct-mode
1236 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1237 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1238
1239 @item --print-insn-syntax
1240 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1241
1242 @item --print-opcodes
1243 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1244
1245 @item --generate-example
1246 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1247 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1248
1249 @end table
1250 @end ifset
1251
1252 @ifset SPARC
1253 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1254 for the SPARC architecture:
1255
1256 @table @gcctabopt
1257 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1258 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1259 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1260
1261 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1262 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1263
1264 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1265 UltraSPARC extensions.
1266
1267 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1268 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1269 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1270
1271 @item -bump
1272 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1273 @end table
1274 @end ifset
1275
1276 @ifset TIC54X
1277 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1278 architecture.
1279
1280 @table @gcctabopt
1281 @item -mfar-mode
1282 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1283 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1284 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1285 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1286 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1287 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1288 behaviour in the shell.
1289 @end table
1290 @end ifset
1291
1292 @ifset MIPS
1293 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1294 a MIPS processor.
1295
1296 @table @gcctabopt
1297 @item -G @var{num}
1298 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1299 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1300 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1301
1302 @cindex MIPS endianness
1303 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1304 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1305 @item -EB
1306 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1307
1308 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1309 @item -EL
1310 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1311
1312 @cindex MIPS ISA
1313 @item -mips1
1314 @itemx -mips2
1315 @itemx -mips3
1316 @itemx -mips4
1317 @itemx -mips5
1318 @itemx -mips32
1319 @itemx -mips32r2
1320 @itemx -mips32r3
1321 @itemx -mips32r5
1322 @itemx -mips32r6
1323 @itemx -mips64
1324 @itemx -mips64r2
1325 @itemx -mips64r3
1326 @itemx -mips64r5
1327 @itemx -mips64r6
1328 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1329 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1330 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1331 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1332 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1333 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1334 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1335 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1336 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1337 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1338
1339 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1340 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1341
1342 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1343 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1344
1345 @item -mfix7000
1346 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1347 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1348 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1349
1350 @item -mfix-rm7000
1351 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1352 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1353 followed by a load instruction.
1354
1355 @item -mdebug
1356 @itemx -no-mdebug
1357 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1358 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1359
1360 @item -mpdr
1361 @itemx -mno-pdr
1362 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1363
1364 @item -mgp32
1365 @itemx -mfp32
1366 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1367 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1368 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1369 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1370
1371 @item -mgp64
1372 @itemx -mfp64
1373 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1374 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1375 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1376 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1377
1378 @item -mfpxx
1379 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1380 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1381 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1382 32 or 64 bits wide.
1383
1384 @item -modd-spreg
1385 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1386 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1387 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1388 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1389
1390 @item -mips16
1391 @itemx -no-mips16
1392 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1393 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1394 turns off this option.
1395
1396 @item -mmicromips
1397 @itemx -mno-micromips
1398 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1399 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1400 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1401 at the start of the assembly file.
1402
1403 @item -msmartmips
1404 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1405 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1406 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1407 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1408
1409 @item -mips3d
1410 @itemx -no-mips3d
1411 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1412 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1413 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1414
1415 @item -mdmx
1416 @itemx -no-mdmx
1417 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1418 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1419 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1420
1421 @item -mdsp
1422 @itemx -mno-dsp
1423 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1424 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1425 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1426
1427 @item -mdspr2
1428 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1429 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1430 This option implies -mdsp.
1431 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1432 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1433
1434 @item -mmsa
1435 @itemx -mno-msa
1436 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1437 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1438 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1439
1440 @item -mxpa
1441 @itemx -mno-xpa
1442 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1443 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1444 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1445
1446 @item -mmt
1447 @itemx -mno-mt
1448 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1449 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1450 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1451
1452 @item -mmcu
1453 @itemx -mno-mcu
1454 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1455 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1456 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1457
1458 @item -minsn32
1459 @itemx -mno-insn32
1460 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1461 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1462 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1463 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1464 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1465 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1466 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1467
1468 @item --construct-floats
1469 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1470 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1471 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1472 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1473 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1474 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1475
1476 @item --relax-branch
1477 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1478 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1479 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1480 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1481
1482 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1483 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1484 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1485
1486 @cindex emulation
1487 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1488 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1489 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1490 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1491 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1492
1493 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1494 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1495 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1496 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1497 preferred options instead.
1498
1499 @item -nocpp
1500 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1501 the native tools.
1502
1503 @item --trap
1504 @itemx --no-trap
1505 @itemx --break
1506 @itemx --no-break
1507 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1508 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1509 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1510 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1511 break exception.
1512
1513 @item -n
1514 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1515 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1516 @end table
1517 @end ifset
1518
1519 @ifset MCORE
1520 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1521 an MCore processor.
1522
1523 @table @gcctabopt
1524 @item -jsri2bsr
1525 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1526 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1527 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1528
1529 @item -sifilter
1530 @itemx -nosifilter
1531 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1532 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1533
1534 @item -relax
1535 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1536
1537 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1538 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1539 can be assembled.
1540
1541 @item -EB
1542 Assemble for a big endian target.
1543
1544 @item -EL
1545 Assemble for a little endian target.
1546
1547 @end table
1548 @end ifset
1549 @c man end
1550
1551 @ifset METAG
1552
1553 @ifclear man
1554 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1555 for a Meta processor.
1556 @end ifclear
1557
1558 @ifset man
1559 @c man begin OPTIONS
1560 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1561 Meta processor.
1562 @c man end
1563 @c man begin INCLUDE
1564 @include c-metag.texi
1565 @c ended inside the included file
1566 @end ifset
1567
1568 @end ifset
1569
1570 @c man begin OPTIONS
1571 @ifset MMIX
1572 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1573 @end ifset
1574
1575 @ifset NDS32
1576
1577 @ifclear man
1578 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1579 for a NDS32 processor.
1580 @end ifclear
1581 @c ended inside the included file
1582 @end ifset
1583
1584 @ifset man
1585 @c man begin OPTIONS
1586 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1587 NDS32 processor.
1588 @c man end
1589 @c man begin INCLUDE
1590 @include c-nds32.texi
1591 @c ended inside the included file
1592 @end ifset
1593
1594 @c man end
1595 @ifset PPC
1596
1597 @ifclear man
1598 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1599 for a PowerPC processor.
1600 @end ifclear
1601
1602 @ifset man
1603 @c man begin OPTIONS
1604 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1605 PowerPC processor.
1606 @c man end
1607 @c man begin INCLUDE
1608 @include c-ppc.texi
1609 @c ended inside the included file
1610 @end ifset
1611
1612 @end ifset
1613
1614 @c man begin OPTIONS
1615 @ifset RX
1616 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1617 @end ifset
1618
1619 @ifset S390
1620 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1621 processor family.
1622
1623 @table @gcctabopt
1624 @item -m31
1625 @itemx -m64
1626 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1627 @item -mesa
1628 @item -mzarch
1629 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1630 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1631 @item -march=@var{processor}
1632 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1633 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1634 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1635 @item -mregnames
1636 @itemx -mno-regnames
1637 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1638 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1639 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1640 but evaluates to zero.
1641 @end table
1642 @end ifset
1643 @c man end
1644
1645 @ifset TIC6X
1646
1647 @ifclear man
1648 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1649 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1650 @end ifclear
1651
1652 @ifset man
1653 @c man begin OPTIONS
1654 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1655 TMS320C6000 processor.
1656 @c man end
1657 @c man begin INCLUDE
1658 @include c-tic6x.texi
1659 @c ended inside the included file
1660 @end ifset
1661
1662 @end ifset
1663
1664 @ifset TILEGX
1665
1666 @ifclear man
1667 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1668 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1669 @end ifclear
1670
1671 @ifset man
1672 @c man begin OPTIONS
1673 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1674 processor.
1675 @c man end
1676 @c man begin INCLUDE
1677 @include c-tilegx.texi
1678 @c ended inside the included file
1679 @end ifset
1680
1681 @end ifset
1682
1683 @ifset VISIUM
1684
1685 @ifclear man
1686 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1687 for a Visium processor.
1688 @end ifclear
1689
1690 @ifset man
1691 @c man begin OPTIONS
1692 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1693 processor.
1694 @c man end
1695 @c man begin INCLUDE
1696 @include c-visium.texi
1697 @c ended inside the included file
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @end ifset
1701
1702 @ifset XTENSA
1703
1704 @ifclear man
1705 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1706 for an Xtensa processor.
1707 @end ifclear
1708
1709 @ifset man
1710 @c man begin OPTIONS
1711 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1712 Xtensa processor.
1713 @c man end
1714 @c man begin INCLUDE
1715 @include c-xtensa.texi
1716 @c ended inside the included file
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @end ifset
1720
1721 @c man begin OPTIONS
1722
1723 @ifset Z80
1724 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1725 a Z80 family processor.
1726 @table @gcctabopt
1727 @item -z80
1728 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1729 @item -r800
1730 Assemble for R800 processor.
1731 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1732 @itemx -Wnud
1733 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1734 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1735 @itemx -Wnup
1736 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1737 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1738 @itemx -Wud
1739 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1740 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1741 @itemx -Wup
1742 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1743 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1744 @itemx -Fud
1745 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1746 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1747 @itemx -Fup
1748 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1749 @end table
1750 @end ifset
1751
1752 @c man end
1753
1754 @menu
1755 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1756 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1757 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1758 * Command Line:: Command Line
1759 * Input Files:: Input Files
1760 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1761 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1762 @end menu
1763
1764 @node Manual
1765 @section Structure of this Manual
1766
1767 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1768 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1769 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1770 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1771 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1772
1773 @ifclear GENERIC
1774 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1775 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1776 @end ifclear
1777 @ifset GENERIC
1778 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1779 various flavors of the assembler.
1780 @end ifset
1781
1782 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1783 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1784 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1785 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1786 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1787 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1788 particular architecture.
1789 @ifset GENERIC
1790 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1791 machine architecture manual for this information.
1792 @end ifset
1793 @ifclear GENERIC
1794 @ifset H8/300
1795 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1796 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1797 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1798 @end ifset
1799 @ifset SH
1800 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1801 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1802 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1803 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1804 @end ifset
1805 @ifset Z8000
1806 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1807 @end ifset
1808 @end ifclear
1809
1810 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1811 @ignore
1812 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1813 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1814 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1815 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1816 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1817 qualification.
1818
1819 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1820 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1821 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1822 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1823 @end ignore
1824
1825 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1826 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1827 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1828 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1829 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1830 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1831 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1832 @c directives).
1833
1834 @node GNU Assembler
1835 @section The GNU Assembler
1836
1837 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1838
1839 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1840 @ifclear GENERIC
1841 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1842 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1843 @end ifclear
1844 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1845 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1846 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1847 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1848 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1849
1850 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1851 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1852 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1853 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1854 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1855 machine would assemble.
1856 @ifset VAX
1857 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1858 @end ifset
1859 @ifset M680X0
1860 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1861 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1862 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1863 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1864 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1865 @end ifset
1866
1867 @c man end
1868
1869 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1870 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1871 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1872
1873 @node Object Formats
1874 @section Object File Formats
1875
1876 @cindex object file format
1877 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1878 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1879 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1880 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1881 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1882 @ifclear GENERIC
1883 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1884 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1885 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1886 @end ifclear
1887 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1888 @ifset I960
1889 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1890 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1891 @end ifset
1892 @ifset HPPA
1893 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1894 SOM or ELF format object files.
1895 @end ifset
1896 @end ifclear
1897
1898 @node Command Line
1899 @section Command Line
1900
1901 @cindex command line conventions
1902
1903 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1904 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1905 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1906 significant.
1907
1908 @cindex standard input, as input file
1909 @kindex --
1910 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1911 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1912
1913 @cindex options, command line
1914 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1915 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1916 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1917 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1918 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1919
1920 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1921 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1922 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1923 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1924
1925 @smallexample
1926 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1927 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1928 @end smallexample
1929
1930 @node Input Files
1931 @section Input Files
1932
1933 @cindex input
1934 @cindex source program
1935 @cindex files, input
1936 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1937 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1938 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1939 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1940
1941 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1942 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1943 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1944 order specified.
1945
1946 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1947 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1948 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1949 (The standard input is also a file.)
1950
1951 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1952 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1953 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1954 is taken to be an input file name.
1955
1956 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1957 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1958 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1959 to assemble.
1960
1961 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1962 in your command line.
1963
1964 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1965 file.
1966
1967 @c man end
1968
1969 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1970
1971 @cindex input file linenumbers
1972 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1973 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1974 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1975 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1976 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1977
1978 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1979 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1980
1981 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1982 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1983 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1984 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1985 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1986 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1987
1988 @node Object
1989 @section Output (Object) File
1990
1991 @cindex object file
1992 @cindex output file
1993 @kindex a.out
1994 @kindex .o
1995 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1996 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1997 is the object file. Its default name is
1998 @ifclear BOUT
1999 @code{a.out}.
2000 @end ifclear
2001 @ifset BOUT
2002 @ifset GENERIC
2003 @code{a.out}, or
2004 @end ifset
2005 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2006 @end ifset
2007 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2008 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2009 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2010 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2011 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2012
2013 @cindex linker
2014 @kindex ld
2015 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2016 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2017 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2018 information for the debugger.
2019
2020 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2021 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2022
2023 @node Errors
2024 @section Error and Warning Messages
2025
2026 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2027
2028 @cindex error messages
2029 @cindex warning messages
2030 @cindex messages from assembler
2031 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2032 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2033 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2034 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2035 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2036
2037 @c man end
2038
2039 @cindex format of warning messages
2040 Warning messages have the format
2041
2042 @smallexample
2043 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2044 @end smallexample
2045
2046 @noindent
2047 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2048 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2049 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2050 @ifset GENERIC
2051 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2052 @end ifset
2053 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2054 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2055 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2056
2057 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2058 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2059
2060 @smallexample
2061 .file 2 "bar.c"
2062 error_assembler_source
2063 .file "foo.c"
2064 .line 30
2065 error_c_source
2066 @end smallexample
2067
2068 produces this output:
2069
2070 @smallexample
2071 Assembler messages:
2072 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2073 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2074 @end smallexample
2075
2076 @cindex format of error messages
2077 Error messages have the format
2078
2079 @smallexample
2080 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2081 @end smallexample
2082
2083 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2084 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2085 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2086
2087 @node Invoking
2088 @chapter Command-Line Options
2089
2090 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2091 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2092 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2093 for options specific
2094 @ifclear GENERIC
2095 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2096 @end ifclear
2097 @ifset GENERIC
2098 to particular machine architectures.
2099 @end ifset
2100
2101 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2102
2103 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2104 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2105 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2106 by commas. For example:
2107
2108 @smallexample
2109 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2110 @end smallexample
2111
2112 @noindent
2113 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2114 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2115 local symbols in the symbol table).
2116
2117 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2118 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2119 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2120 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2121 assembler.)
2122
2123 @c man end
2124
2125 @menu
2126 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2127 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2128 * D:: -D for compatibility
2129 * f:: -f to work faster
2130 * I:: -I for .include search path
2131 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2132 * K:: -K for compatibility
2133 @end ifclear
2134 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2135 * K:: -K for difference tables
2136 @end ifset
2137
2138 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2139 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2140 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2141 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2142 * o:: -o to name the object file
2143 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2144 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2145 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2146 * v:: -v to announce version
2147 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2148 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2149 @end menu
2150
2151 @node a
2152 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2153
2154 @kindex -a
2155 @kindex -ac
2156 @kindex -ad
2157 @kindex -ag
2158 @kindex -ah
2159 @kindex -al
2160 @kindex -an
2161 @kindex -as
2162 @cindex listings, enabling
2163 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2164
2165 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2166 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2167 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2168 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2169 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2170 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2171 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2172 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2173 also.
2174
2175 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2176 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2177
2178 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2179 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2180 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2181 omitted from the listing.
2182
2183 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2184 listing.
2185
2186 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2187 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2188 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2189 @code{.sbttl}.
2190 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2191 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2192 listing-control directives have no effect.
2193
2194 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2195 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2196
2197 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2198 because it
2199 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2200 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2201 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2202 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2203 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2204
2205 @node alternate
2206 @section @option{--alternate}
2207
2208 @kindex --alternate
2209 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2210
2211 @node D
2212 @section @option{-D}
2213
2214 @kindex -D
2215 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2216 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2217 @command{@value{AS}}.
2218
2219 @node f
2220 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2221
2222 @kindex -f
2223 @cindex trusted compiler
2224 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2225 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2226 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2227 and comment preprocessing on
2228 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2229 ,Preprocessing}.
2230
2231 @quotation
2232 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2233 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2234 not work correctly.
2235 @end quotation
2236
2237 @node I
2238 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2239
2240 @kindex -I @var{path}
2241 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2242 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2243 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2244 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2245 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2246 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2247 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2248 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2249 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2250 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2251
2252 @node K
2253 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2254
2255 @kindex -K
2256 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2257 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2258 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2259 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2260 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2261 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2262 alteration on other platforms.
2263 @end ifclear
2264
2265 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2266 @cindex difference tables, warning
2267 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2268 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2269 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2270 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2271 is done.
2272 @end ifset
2273
2274 @node L
2275 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2276
2277 @kindex -L
2278 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2279 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2280 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2281 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2282 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2283 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2284 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2285 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2286
2287 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2288 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2289 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2290
2291 @node listing
2292 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2293
2294 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2295 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2296 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2297 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2298 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2299 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2300 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2301 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2302
2303 @table @gcctabopt
2304 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2305 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2306 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2307 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2308 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2309
2310 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2311 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2312 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2313 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2314 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2315 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2316 switch is used the default is to one.
2317
2318 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2319 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2320 @cindex Width of source line output
2321 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2322 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2323 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2324
2325 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2326 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2327 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2328 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2329 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2330 @end table
2331
2332 @node M
2333 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2334
2335 @kindex -M
2336 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2337 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2338 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2339 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2340 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2341 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2342 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2343 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2344 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2345
2346 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2347 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2348 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2349 individually. These are:
2350
2351 @itemize @bullet
2352 @item global symbols in common section
2353
2354 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2355 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2356 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2357 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2358 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2359
2360 @item complex relocations
2361
2362 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2363 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2364 are not support by other object file formats.
2365
2366 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2367
2368 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2369 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2370 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2371 script.
2372
2373 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2374
2375 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2376 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2377
2378 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2379
2380 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2381 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2382 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2383 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2384 assigned within a linker script.
2385 @end itemize
2386
2387 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2388 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2389 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2390
2391 @itemize @bullet
2392
2393 @item EBCDIC strings
2394
2395 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2396
2397 @item packed binary coded decimal
2398
2399 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2400 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2401
2402 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2403
2404 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2405
2406 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2407
2408 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2409
2410 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2411
2412 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2413 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2414 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2415 these options serve no purpose.
2416
2417 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2418
2419 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2420 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2421 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2422
2423 @item other @code{OPT} options
2424
2425 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2426 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2427
2428 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2429
2430 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2431 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2432
2433 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2434
2435 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2436
2437 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2438
2439 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2440
2441 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2442
2443 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2444
2445 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2446
2447 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2448
2449 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2450
2451 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2452
2453 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2454
2455 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2456
2457 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2458
2459 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2460
2461 @end itemize
2462
2463 @node MD
2464 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2465
2466 @kindex --MD
2467 @cindex dependency tracking
2468 @cindex make rules
2469
2470 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2471 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2472 dependencies of the main source file.
2473
2474 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2475
2476 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2477
2478 @node o
2479 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2480
2481 @kindex -o
2482 @cindex naming object file
2483 @cindex object file name
2484 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2485 default it has the name
2486 @ifset GENERIC
2487 @ifset I960
2488 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2489 @end ifset
2490 @ifclear I960
2491 @file{a.out}.
2492 @end ifclear
2493 @end ifset
2494 @ifclear GENERIC
2495 @ifset I960
2496 @file{b.out}.
2497 @end ifset
2498 @ifclear I960
2499 @file{a.out}.
2500 @end ifclear
2501 @end ifclear
2502 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2503 object file a different name.
2504
2505 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2506 existing file of the same name.
2507
2508 @node R
2509 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2510
2511 @kindex -R
2512 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2513 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2514 @cindex joining text and data sections
2515 @cindex merging text and data sections
2516 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2517 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2518 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2519 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2520 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2521 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2522
2523 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2524 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2525 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2526 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2527
2528 @ifset COFF-ELF
2529 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2530 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2531 @samp{.data}.
2532 @end ifset
2533
2534 @ifset HPPA
2535 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2536 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2537 @end ifset
2538
2539 @node statistics
2540 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2541
2542 @kindex --statistics
2543 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2544 @cindex time, total for assembly
2545 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2546 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2547 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2548 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2549 seconds).
2550
2551 @node traditional-format
2552 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2553
2554 @kindex --traditional-format
2555 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2556 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2557 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2558
2559 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2560 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2561
2562 @node v
2563 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2564
2565 @kindex -v
2566 @kindex -version
2567 @cindex assembler version
2568 @cindex version of assembler
2569 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2570 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2571 command line.
2572
2573 @node W
2574 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2575
2576 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2577 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2578 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2579 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2580
2581 @kindex -W
2582 @kindex --no-warn
2583 @cindex suppressing warnings
2584 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2585 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2586 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2587 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2588 are still reported.
2589
2590 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2591 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2592 @cindex warnings, causing error
2593 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2594 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2595
2596 @kindex --warn
2597 @cindex warnings, switching on
2598 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2599 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2600
2601 @node Z
2602 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2603 @cindex object file, after errors
2604 @cindex errors, continuing after
2605 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2606 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2607 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2608 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2609 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2610 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2611
2612 @node Syntax
2613 @chapter Syntax
2614
2615 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2616 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2617 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2618 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2619 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2620 @ifclear VAX
2621 assembler.
2622 @end ifclear
2623 @ifset VAX
2624 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2625 @end ifset
2626
2627 @menu
2628 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2629 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2630 * Comments:: Comments
2631 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2632 * Statements:: Statements
2633 * Constants:: Constants
2634 @end menu
2635
2636 @node Preprocessing
2637 @section Preprocessing
2638
2639 @cindex preprocessing
2640 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2641 @itemize @bullet
2642 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2643 @item
2644 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2645 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2646 a single space.
2647
2648 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2649 @item
2650 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2651 appropriate number of newlines.
2652
2653 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2654 @item
2655 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2656 @end itemize
2657
2658 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2659 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2660 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2661 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2662 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2663 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2664 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2665
2666 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2667 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2668 preprocessed.
2669
2670 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2671 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2672 @kindex #NO_APP
2673 @kindex #APP
2674 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2675 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2676 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2677 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2678 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2679 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2680 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2681 and whitespace.
2682
2683 @node Whitespace
2684 @section Whitespace
2685
2686 @cindex whitespace
2687 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2688 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2689 people to read. Unless within character constants
2690 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2691 as exactly one space.
2692
2693 @node Comments
2694 @section Comments
2695
2696 @cindex comments
2697 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2698 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2699
2700 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2701 This means you may not nest these comments.
2702
2703 @smallexample
2704 /*
2705 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2706 is to use this sort of comment.
2707 */
2708
2709 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2710 @end smallexample
2711
2712 @cindex line comment character
2713 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2714 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2715 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2716 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2717 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2718 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2719 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2720 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2721
2722 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2723 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2724 to specify logical line numbers:
2725
2726 @kindex #
2727 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2728 @cindex logical line numbers
2729 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2730 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2731 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2732 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2733 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2734
2735 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2736 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2737
2738 @smallexample
2739 # This is an ordinary comment.
2740 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2741 # This is logical line # 36.
2742 @end smallexample
2743 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2744 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2745
2746 @node Symbol Intro
2747 @section Symbols
2748
2749 @cindex characters used in symbols
2750 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2751 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2752 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2753 @samp{_.$}.
2754 @end ifclear
2755 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2756 @ifclear GENERIC
2757 @ifset H8
2758 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2759 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2760 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2761 symbol names.)
2762 @end ifset
2763 @end ifclear
2764 @end ifset
2765 @ifset GENERIC
2766 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2767 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2768 @end ifset
2769 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2770 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2771 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2772 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2773 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2774
2775 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2776 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2777 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2778 backslash @code{\} character.
2779 @cindex length of symbols
2780
2781 @node Statements
2782 @section Statements
2783
2784 @cindex statements, structure of
2785 @cindex line separator character
2786 @cindex statement separator character
2787
2788 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2789 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2790 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2791 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2792 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2793 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2794 exception: they do not end statements.
2795
2796 @cindex newline, required at file end
2797 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2798 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2799 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2800
2801 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2802
2803 @cindex instructions and directives
2804 @cindex directives and instructions
2805 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2806 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2807 @c 13feb91.
2808 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2809 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2810 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2811 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2812 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2813 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2814 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2815 @ifset GENERIC
2816 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2817 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2818 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2819 language.@refill
2820 @end ifset
2821
2822 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2823 @cindex label (@code{:})
2824 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2825 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2826 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2827
2828 @ifset HPPA
2829 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2830 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2831 only one label may be defined on each line.
2832 @end ifset
2833
2834 @smallexample
2835 label: .directive followed by something
2836 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2837 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2838 @end smallexample
2839
2840 @node Constants
2841 @section Constants
2842
2843 @cindex constants
2844 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2845 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2846 @smallexample
2847 @group
2848 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2849 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2850 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2851 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2852 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2853 @end group
2854 @end smallexample
2855
2856 @menu
2857 * Characters:: Character Constants
2858 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2859 @end menu
2860
2861 @node Characters
2862 @subsection Character Constants
2863
2864 @cindex character constants
2865 @cindex constants, character
2866 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2867 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2868 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2869 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2870 used in arithmetic expressions.
2871
2872 @menu
2873 * Strings:: Strings
2874 * Chars:: Characters
2875 @end menu
2876
2877 @node Strings
2878 @subsubsection Strings
2879
2880 @cindex string constants
2881 @cindex constants, string
2882 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2883 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2884 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2885 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2886 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2887 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2888 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2889 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2890
2891 @cindex escape codes, character
2892 @cindex character escape codes
2893 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2894 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2895 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2896 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2897 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2898 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2899 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2900 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2901 @table @kbd
2902 @c @item \a
2903 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2904 @c
2905 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2906 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2907 @item \b
2908 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2909
2910 @c @item \e
2911 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2912 @c
2913 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2914 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2915 @item backslash-f
2916 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2917
2918 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2919 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2920 @item \n
2921 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2922
2923 @c @item \p
2924 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2925 @c
2926 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2927 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2928 @item \r
2929 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2930
2931 @c @item \s
2932 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2933 @c other assemblers.
2934 @c
2935 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2936 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2937 @item \t
2938 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2939
2940 @c @item \v
2941 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2942 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2943 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2944 @c
2945 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2946 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2947 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2948 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2949 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2950 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2951
2952 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2953 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2954 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2955 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2956 lower case @code{x} works.
2957
2958 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
2959 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2960 @item \\
2961 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2962
2963 @c @item \'
2964 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2965 @c This is needed in single character literals
2966 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2967 @c a @samp{'}.
2968 @c
2969 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
2970 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2971 @item \"
2972 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2973 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2974
2975 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2976 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2977 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2978 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2979 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2980 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2981 code and warns you of the fact.
2982 @end table
2983
2984 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2985 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2986 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2987 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2988 sequence.
2989
2990 @node Chars
2991 @subsubsection Characters
2992
2993 @cindex single character constant
2994 @cindex character, single
2995 @cindex constant, single character
2996 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2997 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2998 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2999 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
3000 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
3001 grave accent. A newline
3002 @ifclear GENERIC
3003 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3004 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3005 @end ifclear
3006 @ifset abnormal-separator
3007 @ifset H8
3008 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3009 Renesas SH)
3010 @end ifset
3011 @end ifset
3012 @end ifclear
3013 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3014 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3015 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3016 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3017 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3018
3019 @node Numbers
3020 @subsection Number Constants
3021
3022 @cindex constants, number
3023 @cindex number constants
3024 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3025 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3026 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3027 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3028 are floating point numbers, described below.
3029
3030 @menu
3031 * Integers:: Integers
3032 * Bignums:: Bignums
3033 * Flonums:: Flonums
3034 @ifclear GENERIC
3035 @ifset I960
3036 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3037 @end ifset
3038 @end ifclear
3039 @end menu
3040
3041 @node Integers
3042 @subsubsection Integers
3043 @cindex integers
3044 @cindex constants, integer
3045
3046 @cindex binary integers
3047 @cindex integers, binary
3048 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3049 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3050
3051 @cindex octal integers
3052 @cindex integers, octal
3053 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3054 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3055
3056 @cindex decimal integers
3057 @cindex integers, decimal
3058 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3059 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3060
3061 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3062 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3063 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3064 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3065
3066 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3067 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3068 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3069
3070 @node Bignums
3071 @subsubsection Bignums
3072
3073 @cindex bignums
3074 @cindex constants, bignum
3075 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3076 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3077 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3078 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3079
3080 @node Flonums
3081 @subsubsection Flonums
3082 @cindex flonums
3083 @cindex floating point numbers
3084 @cindex constants, floating point
3085
3086 @cindex precision, floating point
3087 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3088 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3089 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3090 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3091 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3092 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3093
3094 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3095 @itemize @bullet
3096 @item
3097 The digit @samp{0}.
3098 @ifset HPPA
3099 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3100 @end ifset
3101
3102 @item
3103 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3104 @ifset GENERIC
3105 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3106 @ignore
3107 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3108 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3109 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3110 @end ignore
3111
3112 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3113 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3114 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3115
3116 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3117 (in upper or lower case).
3118
3119 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3120 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3121
3122 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3123 @end ifset
3124 @ifclear GENERIC
3125 @ifset ARC
3126 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3127 @end ifset
3128 @ifset H8
3129 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3130 @end ifset
3131 @ifset HPPA
3132 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3133 @end ifset
3134 @ifset I960
3135 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3136 @end ifset
3137 @end ifclear
3138
3139 @item
3140 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3141
3142 @item
3143 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3144
3145 @item
3146 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3147 or more decimal digits.
3148
3149 @item
3150 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3151
3152 @itemize @bullet
3153 @item
3154 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3155 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3156 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3157 @item
3158 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3159 @item
3160 One or more decimal digits.
3161 @end itemize
3162
3163 @end itemize
3164
3165 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3166 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3167
3168 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3169 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3170 @command{@value{AS}}.
3171
3172 @ifclear GENERIC
3173 @ifset I960
3174 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3175 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3176 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3177 @node Bit Fields
3178 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3179
3180 @cindex bit fields
3181 @cindex constants, bit field
3182 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3183 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3184 @example
3185 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3186 @end example
3187 @noindent
3188 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3189 @var{value}.
3190
3191 The resulting number is then packed
3192 @ifset GENERIC
3193 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3194 (in host-dependent byte order)
3195 @end ifset
3196 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3197 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3198 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3199 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3200 least significant digits.@refill
3201
3202 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3203 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3204 @end ifset
3205 @end ifclear
3206
3207 @node Sections
3208 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3209 @cindex sections
3210 @cindex relocation
3211
3212 @menu
3213 * Secs Background:: Background
3214 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3215 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3216 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3217 * bss:: bss Section
3218 @end menu
3219
3220 @node Secs Background
3221 @section Background
3222
3223 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3224 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3225 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3226
3227 @cindex linker, and assembler
3228 @cindex assembler, and linker
3229 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3230 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3231 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3232 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3233 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3234 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3235 sections.
3236
3237 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3238 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3239 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3240 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3241 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3242 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3243 the proper run-time addresses.
3244 @ifset H8
3245 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3246 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3247 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3248 @end ifset
3249
3250 @cindex standard assembler sections
3251 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3252 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3253 @dfn{bss} sections.
3254
3255 @ifset COFF-ELF
3256 @ifset GENERIC
3257 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3258 @end ifset
3259 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3260 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3261 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3262 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3263 @end ifset
3264
3265 @ifset HPPA
3266 @ifset GENERIC
3267 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3268 @end ifset
3269 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3270 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3271 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3272 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3273 assembler directives.
3274
3275 @ifset SOM
3276 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3277 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3278 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3279 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3280 @end ifset
3281 @end ifset
3282
3283 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3284 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3285
3286 @ifset HPPA
3287 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3288 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3289 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3290 @end ifset
3291
3292 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3293 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3294 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3295 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3296 file is mentioned:
3297 @itemize @bullet
3298 @item
3299 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3300 an address?
3301 @item
3302 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3303 @item
3304 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3305 @display
3306 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3307 @end display
3308 @item
3309 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3310 @end itemize
3311
3312 @cindex addresses, format of
3313 @cindex section-relative addressing
3314 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3315 @display
3316 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3317 @end display
3318 @noindent
3319 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3320 nature.
3321 @ifset SOM
3322 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3323 symbol-relative instead.)
3324 @end ifset
3325
3326 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3327 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3328
3329 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3330 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3331 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3332 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3333 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3334 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3335 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3336 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3337 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3338
3339 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3340 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3341 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3342 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3343 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3344 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3345 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3346
3347 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3348 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3349 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3350 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3351 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3352 data and bss sections.
3353
3354 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3355 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3356
3357 @node Ld Sections
3358 @section Linker Sections
3359 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3360
3361 @table @strong
3362
3363 @ifset COFF-ELF
3364 @cindex named sections
3365 @cindex sections, named
3366 @item named sections
3367 @end ifset
3368 @ifset aout-bout
3369 @cindex text section
3370 @cindex data section
3371 @itemx text section
3372 @itemx data section
3373 @end ifset
3374 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3375 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3376 true of another.
3377 @c @ifset aout-bout
3378 When the program is running, however, it is
3379 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3380 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3381 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3382 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3383 in the data section.
3384 @c @end ifset
3385
3386 @cindex bss section
3387 @item bss section
3388 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3389 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3390 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3391 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3392 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3393 those explicit zeros from object files.
3394
3395 @cindex absolute section
3396 @item absolute section
3397 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3398 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3399 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3400 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3401
3402 @cindex undefined section
3403 @item undefined section
3404 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3405 the preceding sections.
3406 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3407 @end table
3408
3409 @cindex relocation example
3410 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3411 @ifset COFF-ELF
3412 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3413 @end ifset
3414 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3415
3416 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3417 @ifnottex
3418 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3419 @smallexample
3420 +-----+----+--+
3421 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3422 +-----+----+--+
3423
3424 text data bss
3425 seg. seg. seg.
3426
3427 +---+---+---+
3428 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3429 +---+---+---+
3430
3431 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3432 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3433 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3434
3435 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3436 @end smallexample
3437 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3438 @end ifnottex
3439 @need 5000
3440 @tex
3441 \bigskip
3442 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3443 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3444 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3445
3446 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3447 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3448 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3449
3450 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3451 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3452 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3453 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3454 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3455
3456 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3457 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3458
3459 @end tex
3460 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3461
3462 @node As Sections
3463 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3464
3465 @cindex internal assembler sections
3466 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3467 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3468 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3469 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3470 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3471 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3472 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3473 section-relative address.
3474
3475 @table @b
3476 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3477 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3478 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3479 bug in the assembler.
3480
3481 @cindex expr (internal section)
3482 @item expr section
3483 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3484 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3485 it in the expr section.
3486 @c FIXME item debug
3487 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3488 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3489 @c FIXME item register
3490 @end table
3491
3492 @node Sub-Sections
3493 @section Sub-Sections
3494
3495 @cindex numbered subsections
3496 @cindex grouping data
3497 @ifset aout-bout
3498 Assembled bytes
3499 @ifset COFF-ELF
3500 conventionally
3501 @end ifset
3502 fall into two sections: text and data.
3503 @end ifset
3504 You may have separate groups of
3505 @ifset GENERIC
3506 data in named sections
3507 @end ifset
3508 @ifclear GENERIC
3509 @ifclear aout-bout
3510 data in named sections
3511 @end ifclear
3512 @ifset aout-bout
3513 text or data
3514 @end ifset
3515 @end ifclear
3516 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3517 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3518 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3519 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3520 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3521 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3522 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3523 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3524 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3525 constants being output.
3526
3527 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3528 goes in subsection number zero.
3529
3530 @ifset GENERIC
3531 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3532 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3533 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3534 @end ifset
3535 @ifclear GENERIC
3536 @ifset H8
3537 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3538 boundary (two bytes).
3539 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3540 @end ifset
3541 @ifset I960
3542 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3543 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3544 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3545 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3546 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3547 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3548 @end ifset
3549 @end ifclear
3550
3551 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3552 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3553 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3554 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3555 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3556 data subsections as a data section.
3557
3558 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3559 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3560 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3561 @ifset COFF
3562 @ifset GENERIC
3563 When generating COFF output, you
3564 @end ifset
3565 @ifclear GENERIC
3566 You
3567 @end ifclear
3568 can also use an extra subsection
3569 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3570 @var{expression}}.
3571 @end ifset
3572 @ifset ELF
3573 @ifset GENERIC
3574 When generating ELF output, you
3575 @end ifset
3576 @ifclear GENERIC
3577 You
3578 @end ifclear
3579 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3580 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3581 @end ifset
3582 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3583 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3584 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3585 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3586 @smallexample
3587 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3588 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3589 .text 1
3590 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3591 .data 0
3592 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3593 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3594 .text 0
3595 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3596 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3597 @end smallexample
3598
3599 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3600 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3601 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3602 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3603 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3604 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3605 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3606
3607 @node bss
3608 @section bss Section
3609
3610 @cindex bss section
3611 @cindex common variable storage
3612 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3613 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3614 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3615 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3616 section are zeroed bytes.
3617
3618 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3619 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3620
3621 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3622 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3623
3624 @ifset GENERIC
3625 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3626 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3627 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3628 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3629 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3630 @end ifset
3631
3632 @node Symbols
3633 @chapter Symbols
3634
3635 @cindex symbols
3636 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3637 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3638 to debug.
3639
3640 @quotation
3641 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3642 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3643 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3644 @end quotation
3645
3646 @menu
3647 * Labels:: Labels
3648 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3649 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3650 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3651 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3652 @end menu
3653
3654 @node Labels
3655 @section Labels
3656
3657 @cindex labels
3658 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3659 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3660 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3661 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3662 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3663 definitions.
3664
3665 @ifset HPPA
3666 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3667 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3668 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3669 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3670 @end ifset
3671
3672 @node Setting Symbols
3673 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3674
3675 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3676 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3677 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3678 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3679 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3680 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3681 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3682 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3683
3684 @ifset Blackfin
3685 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3686 @end ifset
3687
3688 @node Symbol Names
3689 @section Symbol Names
3690
3691 @cindex symbol names
3692 @cindex names, symbol
3693 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3694 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3695 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3696 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3697 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3698 particular target machine), and underscores.
3699 @end ifclear
3700 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3701 @ifset H8
3702 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3703 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3704 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3705 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3706 @end ifset
3707 @end ifset
3708
3709 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3710 than @code{Foo}.
3711
3712 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3713 Local Labels. See below.
3714
3715 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3716 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3717 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3718 currently supported.
3719
3720 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3721 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3722 in a program.
3723
3724 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3725
3726 @cindex local symbol names
3727 @cindex symbol names, local
3728 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3729 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3730 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3731 set of local label prefixes.
3732 @ifset HPPA
3733 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3734 @end ifset
3735
3736 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3737 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3738 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3739 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3740
3741 @subheading Local Labels
3742
3743 @cindex local labels
3744 @cindex temporary symbol names
3745 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3746 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3747 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3748 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3749 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3750 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3751 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3752 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3753 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3754 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3755
3756 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3757 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3758 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3759 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3760 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3761 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3762 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3763
3764 Here is an example:
3765
3766 @smallexample
3767 1: branch 1f
3768 2: branch 1b
3769 1: branch 2f
3770 2: branch 1b
3771 @end smallexample
3772
3773 Which is the equivalent of:
3774
3775 @smallexample
3776 label_1: branch label_3
3777 label_2: branch label_1
3778 label_3: branch label_4
3779 label_4: branch label_3
3780 @end smallexample
3781
3782 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3783 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3784 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3785 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3786 these parts:
3787
3788 @table @code
3789 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3790 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3791 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3792 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3793 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3794 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3795 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3796 you may use them in debugging.
3797
3798 @item @var{number}
3799 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3800 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3801
3802 @item @kbd{C-B}
3803 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3804 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3805
3806 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3807 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3808 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3809 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3810 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3811 @end table
3812
3813 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3814 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3815
3816 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3817 @cindex dollar local symbols
3818
3819 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3820 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3821 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3822 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3823 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3824 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3825
3826 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3827 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3828 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3829
3830 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3831 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3832 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3833 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3834
3835 @node Dot
3836 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3837
3838 @cindex dot (symbol)
3839 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3840 @cindex current address
3841 @cindex location counter
3842 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3843 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3844 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3845 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3846 directive.
3847 @ifclear no-space-dir
3848 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3849 @samp{.space 4}.
3850 @end ifclear
3851
3852 @node Symbol Attributes
3853 @section Symbol Attributes
3854
3855 @cindex symbol attributes
3856 @cindex attributes, symbol
3857 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3858 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3859 attributes.
3860 @ifset INTERNALS
3861 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3862 @end ifset
3863
3864 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3865 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3866 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3867 would want.
3868
3869 @menu
3870 * Symbol Value:: Value
3871 * Symbol Type:: Type
3872 @ifset aout-bout
3873 @ifset GENERIC
3874 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3875 @end ifset
3876 @ifclear GENERIC
3877 @ifclear BOUT
3878 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3879 @end ifclear
3880 @ifset BOUT
3881 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3882 @end ifset
3883 @end ifclear
3884 @end ifset
3885 @ifset COFF
3886 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3887 @end ifset
3888 @ifset SOM
3889 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3890 @end ifset
3891 @end menu
3892
3893 @node Symbol Value
3894 @subsection Value
3895
3896 @cindex value of a symbol
3897 @cindex symbol value
3898 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3899 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3900 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3901 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3902 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3903 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3904 called absolute.
3905
3906 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3907 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3908 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3909 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3910 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3911 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3912 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3913 allocated storage.
3914
3915 @node Symbol Type
3916 @subsection Type
3917
3918 @cindex type of a symbol
3919 @cindex symbol type
3920 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3921 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3922 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3923 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3924
3925 @ifset aout-bout
3926 @ifclear GENERIC
3927 @ifset BOUT
3928 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3929 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3930 @need 1000
3931 @node a.out Symbols
3932 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3933
3934 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3935 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3936 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3937 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3938 @code{b.out}.
3939
3940 @end ifset
3941 @ifclear BOUT
3942 @node a.out Symbols
3943 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3944
3945 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3946 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3947
3948 @end ifclear
3949 @end ifclear
3950 @ifset GENERIC
3951 @node a.out Symbols
3952 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3953
3954 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3955 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3956
3957 @end ifset
3958 @menu
3959 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3960 * Symbol Other:: Other
3961 @end menu
3962
3963 @node Symbol Desc
3964 @subsubsection Descriptor
3965
3966 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3967 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3968 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3969 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3970 @command{@value{AS}}.
3971
3972 @node Symbol Other
3973 @subsubsection Other
3974
3975 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3976 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3977 @end ifset
3978
3979 @ifset COFF
3980 @node COFF Symbols
3981 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3982
3983 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3984 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3985
3986 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3987 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3988 @code{.endef} directives.
3989
3990 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3991
3992 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3993 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3994 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3995
3996 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3997
3998 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3999 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4000 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4001 table information for COFF.
4002 @end ifset
4003
4004 @ifset SOM
4005 @node SOM Symbols
4006 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4007
4008 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4009 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4010
4011 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4012 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4013
4014 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4015 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4016 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4017 @end ifset
4018
4019 @node Expressions
4020 @chapter Expressions
4021
4022 @cindex expressions
4023 @cindex addresses
4024 @cindex numeric values
4025 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4026 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4027
4028 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4029 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4030 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4031 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4032 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4033 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4034
4035 @menu
4036 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4037 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4038 @end menu
4039
4040 @node Empty Exprs
4041 @section Empty Expressions
4042
4043 @cindex empty expressions
4044 @cindex expressions, empty
4045 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4046 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4047 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4048 is compatible with other assemblers.
4049
4050 @node Integer Exprs
4051 @section Integer Expressions
4052
4053 @cindex integer expressions
4054 @cindex expressions, integer
4055 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4056 by @emph{operators}.
4057
4058 @menu
4059 * Arguments:: Arguments
4060 * Operators:: Operators
4061 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4062 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4063 @end menu
4064
4065 @node Arguments
4066 @subsection Arguments
4067
4068 @cindex expression arguments
4069 @cindex arguments in expressions
4070 @cindex operands in expressions
4071 @cindex arithmetic operands
4072 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4073 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4074 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4075 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4076 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4077 instruction operands.
4078
4079 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4080 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4081 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4082 integer.
4083
4084 Numbers are usually integers.
4085
4086 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4087 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4088 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4089 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4090 assemblers.
4091
4092 @cindex subexpressions
4093 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4094 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4095 operator followed by an argument.
4096
4097 @node Operators
4098 @subsection Operators
4099
4100 @cindex operators, in expressions
4101 @cindex arithmetic functions
4102 @cindex functions, in expressions
4103 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4104 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4105 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4106 whitespace.
4107
4108 @node Prefix Ops
4109 @subsection Prefix Operator
4110
4111 @cindex prefix operators
4112 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4113 one argument, which must be absolute.
4114
4115 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4116 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4117 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4118 @tex
4119 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4120 @end tex
4121
4122 @table @code
4123 @item -
4124 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4125 @item ~
4126 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4127 @end table
4128
4129 @tex
4130 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4131 @end tex
4132
4133 @node Infix Ops
4134 @subsection Infix Operators
4135
4136 @cindex infix operators
4137 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4138 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4139 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4140 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4141 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4142
4143 @enumerate
4144 @cindex operator precedence
4145 @cindex precedence of operators
4146
4147 @item
4148 Highest Precedence
4149
4150 @table @code
4151 @item *
4152 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4153
4154 @item /
4155 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4156
4157 @item %
4158 @dfn{Remainder}.
4159
4160 @item <<
4161 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4162
4163 @item >>
4164 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4165 @end table
4166
4167 @item
4168 Intermediate precedence
4169
4170 @table @code
4171 @item |
4172
4173 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4174
4175 @item &
4176 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4177
4178 @item ^
4179 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4180
4181 @item !
4182 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4183 @end table
4184
4185 @item
4186 Low Precedence
4187
4188 @table @code
4189 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4190 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4191 @cindex arguments for addition
4192 @item +
4193 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4194 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4195 sections.
4196
4197 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4198 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4199 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4200 @item -
4201 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4202 result has the section of the left argument.
4203 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4204 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4205 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4206
4207 @cindex comparison expressions
4208 @cindex expressions, comparison
4209 @item ==
4210 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4211 @item <>
4212 @itemx !=
4213 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4214 @item <
4215 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4216 @item >
4217 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4218 @item >=
4219 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4220 @item <=
4221 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4222
4223 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4224 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4225 perform signed comparisons.
4226 @end table
4227
4228 @item Lowest Precedence
4229
4230 @table @code
4231 @item &&
4232 @dfn{Logical And}.
4233
4234 @item ||
4235 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4236
4237 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4238 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4239 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4240 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4241
4242 @end table
4243 @end enumerate
4244
4245 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4246 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4247
4248 @node Pseudo Ops
4249 @chapter Assembler Directives
4250
4251 @cindex directives, machine independent
4252 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4253 @cindex machine independent directives
4254 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4255 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4256 in lower case.
4257
4258 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4259 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4260 @ifset GENERIC
4261 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4262 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4263 @end ifset
4264 @ifclear GENERIC
4265 @ifset machine-directives
4266 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4267 @end ifset
4268 @end ifclear
4269
4270 @menu
4271 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4272 @ifset COFF
4273 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4277 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4278 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4279 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4280 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4281 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4282 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4283 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4284 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4285 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4286 @ifset COFF
4287 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4288 @end ifset
4289 @ifset aout-bout
4290 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4291 @end ifset
4292 @ifset COFF
4293 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4294 @end ifset
4295
4296 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4297 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4298 * Else:: @code{.else}
4299 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4300 * End:: @code{.end}
4301 @ifset COFF
4302 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4303 @end ifset
4304
4305 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4306 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4307 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4308 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4309 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4310 * Err:: @code{.err}
4311 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4312 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4313 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4314 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4315 * File:: @code{.file}
4316 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4317 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4318 * Func:: @code{.func}
4319 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4320 @ifset ELF
4321 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4322 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4323 @end ifset
4324
4325 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4326 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4327 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4328 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4329 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4330 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4331 @ifset ELF
4332 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4333 @end ifset
4334
4335 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4336 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4337 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4338 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4339 @ifclear no-line-dir
4340 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4341 @end ifclear
4342
4343 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4344 * List:: @code{.list}
4345 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4346 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4347 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4348 @ifset ELF
4349 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4350 @end ifset
4351
4352 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4353 @ignore
4354 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4355 @end ignore
4356
4357 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4358 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4359 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4360 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4361 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4362 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4363 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4364 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4365 @ifset ELF
4366 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4367 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4368 @end ifset
4369
4370 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4371 @ifset ELF
4372 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4373 @end ifset
4374
4375 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4376 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4377 @ifset ELF
4378 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4379 @end ifset
4380
4381 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4382 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4383 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4384 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4385 @ifset COFF
4386 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4387 @end ifset
4388 @ifset COFF-ELF
4389 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4390 @end ifset
4391
4392 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4393 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4394 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4395 @ifset COFF-ELF
4396 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4397 @end ifset
4398 @ifclear no-space-dir
4399 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4400 @end ifclear
4401
4402 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4403 @ifclear no-space-dir
4404 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4405 @end ifclear
4406 @ifset have-stabs
4407 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4408 @end ifset
4409
4410 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4411 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4412 @ifset ELF
4413 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4414 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4415 @end ifset
4416
4417 @ifset COFF
4418 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4419 @end ifset
4420
4421 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4422 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4423 @ifset COFF-ELF
4424 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4425 @end ifset
4426
4427 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4428 @ifset COFF
4429 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4430 @end ifset
4431
4432 @ifset ELF
4433 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4434 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4435 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4436 @end ifset
4437
4438 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4439 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4440 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4441 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4442 @ifclear no-space-dir
4443 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4444 @end ifclear
4445 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4446 @end menu
4447
4448 @node Abort
4449 @section @code{.abort}
4450
4451 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4452 @cindex stopping the assembly
4453 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4454 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4455 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4456 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4457 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4458
4459 @ifset COFF
4460 @node ABORT (COFF)
4461 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4462
4463 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4464 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4465 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4466
4467 @ifset BOUT
4468 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4469 but ignores it.
4470 @end ifset
4471 @end ifset
4472
4473 @node Align
4474 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4475
4476 @cindex padding the location counter
4477 @cindex @code{align} directive
4478 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4479 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4480 required, as described below.
4481
4482 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4483 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4484 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4485 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4486 with no-op instructions.
4487
4488 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4489 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4490 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4491 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4492 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4493 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4494 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4495
4496 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4497 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4498 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4499 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4500 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4501 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4502 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4503
4504 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4505 strongarm, it is the
4506 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4507 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4508 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4509 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4510
4511 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4512 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4513 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4514 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4515 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4516
4517 @node Altmacro
4518 @section @code{.altmacro}
4519 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4520
4521 @ftable @code
4522 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4523 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4524 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4525 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4526 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4527 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4528 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4529
4530 @item String delimiters
4531 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4532 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4533
4534 @table @code
4535 @item '@var{string}'
4536 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4537
4538 @item <@var{string}>
4539 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4540 @end table
4541
4542 @item single-character string escape
4543 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4544 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4545 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4546 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4547
4548 @item Expression results as strings
4549 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4550 and use the result as a string.
4551 @end ftable
4552
4553 @node Ascii
4554 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4555
4556 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4557 @cindex string literals
4558 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4559 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4560 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4561
4562 @node Asciz
4563 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4564
4565 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4566 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4567 @cindex null-terminated strings
4568 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4569 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4570
4571 @node Balign
4572 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4573
4574 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4575 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4576 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4577 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4578 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4579 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4580 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4581
4582 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4583 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4584 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4585 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4586 with no-op instructions.
4587
4588 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4589 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4590 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4591 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4592 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4593 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4594 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4595
4596 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4597 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4598 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4599 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4600 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4601 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4602 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4603 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4604 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4605 undefined.
4606
4607 @node Bundle directives
4608 @section Bundle directives
4609 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4610 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4611 @cindex bundle
4612 @cindex instruction bundle
4613 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4614 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4615 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4616 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4617 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4618 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4619 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4620
4621 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4622 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4623 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4624 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4625 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4626 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4627 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4628 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4629 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4630 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4631 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4632
4633 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4634 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4635 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4636 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4637 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4638 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4639 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4640 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4641 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4642
4643 @cindex bundle-locked
4644 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4645 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4646 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4647 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4648 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4649 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4650 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4651 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4652 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4653 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4654 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4655 bundle size.
4656
4657 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4658 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4659 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4660 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4661 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4662 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4663
4664 @node Byte
4665 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4666
4667 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4668 @cindex integers, one byte
4669 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4670 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4671
4672 @node CFI directives
4673 @section CFI directives
4674 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4675 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4676 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4677 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4678 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4679 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4680 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4681 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4682
4683 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4684 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4685
4686 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4687 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4688 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4689 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4690 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4691 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4692
4693 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4694 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4695
4696 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4697 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4698 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4699 unwind entry previously opened by
4700 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4701
4702 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4703 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4704 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4705 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4706 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4707 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4708 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4709 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4710 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4711 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4712 no personality routine.
4713
4714 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4715 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4716 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4717 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4718 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4719 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4720
4721 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4722 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4723 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4724 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4725 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4726 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4727 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4728 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4729
4730 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4731 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4732 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4733 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4734 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4735 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4736 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4737
4738 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4739 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4740 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4741 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4742 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4743 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4744
4745 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4746 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4747 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4748 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4749 by a section directive.
4750
4751 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4752 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4753 @code{.p2align} directive.
4754
4755 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4756 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4757 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4758
4759 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4760 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4761 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4762 remains the same.
4763
4764 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4765 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4766 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4767 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4768 CFA address.
4769
4770 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4771 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4772 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4773
4774 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4775 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4776 CFA.
4777
4778 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4779 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4780 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4781 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4782 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4783 code it's annotating.
4784
4785 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4786 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4787
4788 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4789 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4790 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4791 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4792
4793 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4794 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4795
4796 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4797 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4798 i.e. no restoration needed.
4799
4800 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4801 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4802 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4803 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4804 the previous saved state.
4805
4806 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4807 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4808 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4809
4810 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4811 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4812
4813 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4814 SPARC register window has been saved.
4815
4816 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4817 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4818 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4819 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4820
4821 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4822 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4823 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4824 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4825
4826 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4827 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4828 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4829 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4830 or another register.
4831
4832 @node Comm
4833 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4834
4835 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4836 @cindex symbol, common
4837 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4838 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4839 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4840 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4841 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4842 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4843 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4844 using the largest size.
4845
4846 @ifset COFF-ELF
4847 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4848 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4849 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4850 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4851 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4852 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4853 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4854 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4855 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4856 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4857 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4858 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4859 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4860 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4861 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4862 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4863 @end ifset
4864
4865 @ifset HPPA
4866 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4867 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4868 @end ifset
4869
4870 @node Data
4871 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4872
4873 @cindex @code{data} directive
4874 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4875 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4876 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4877 to zero.
4878
4879 @ifset COFF
4880 @node Def
4881 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4882
4883 @cindex @code{def} directive
4884 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4885 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4886 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4887 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4888 @ifset BOUT
4889
4890 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4891 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4892 but ignored.
4893 @end ifset
4894 @end ifset
4895
4896 @ifset aout-bout
4897 @node Desc
4898 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4899
4900 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4901 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4902 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4903 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4904 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4905
4906 @ifset COFF
4907 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4908 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4909 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4910 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4911 @end ifset
4912 @end ifset
4913
4914 @ifset COFF
4915 @node Dim
4916 @section @code{.dim}
4917
4918 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4919 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4920 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4921 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4922 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4923 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4924 @ifset BOUT
4925
4926 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4927 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4928 ignores it.
4929 @end ifset
4930 @end ifset
4931
4932 @node Double
4933 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4934
4935 @cindex @code{double} directive
4936 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4937 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4938 assembles floating point numbers.
4939 @ifset GENERIC
4940 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4941 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4942 @end ifset
4943 @ifclear GENERIC
4944 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4945 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4946 in @sc{ieee} format.
4947 @end ifset
4948 @end ifclear
4949
4950 @node Eject
4951 @section @code{.eject}
4952
4953 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4954 @cindex new page, in listings
4955 @cindex page, in listings
4956 @cindex listing control: new page
4957 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4958
4959 @node Else
4960 @section @code{.else}
4961
4962 @cindex @code{else} directive
4963 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4964 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4965 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4966 was false.
4967
4968 @node Elseif
4969 @section @code{.elseif}
4970
4971 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4972 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4973 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4974 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4975
4976 @node End
4977 @section @code{.end}
4978
4979 @cindex @code{end} directive
4980 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4981 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4982
4983 @ifset COFF
4984 @node Endef
4985 @section @code{.endef}
4986
4987 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4988 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4989 @code{.def}.
4990 @ifset BOUT
4991
4992 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4993 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4994 directive but ignores it.
4995 @end ifset
4996 @end ifset
4997
4998 @node Endfunc
4999 @section @code{.endfunc}
5000 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5001 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5002
5003 @node Endif
5004 @section @code{.endif}
5005
5006 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5007 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5008 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5009 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5010
5011 @node Equ
5012 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5013
5014 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5015 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5016 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5017 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5018 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5019
5020 @ifset HPPA
5021 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5022 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5023 @end ifset
5024
5025 @ifset Z80
5026 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5027 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5028 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5029 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5030 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5031 @end ifset
5032
5033 @node Equiv
5034 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5035 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5036 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5037 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5038 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5039 undefined.
5040
5041 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5042 @smallexample
5043 .ifdef SYM
5044 .err
5045 .endif
5046 .equ SYM,VAL
5047 @end smallexample
5048 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5049
5050 @node Eqv
5051 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5052 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5053 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5054 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5055 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5056 value is taken.
5057
5058 @node Err
5059 @section @code{.err}
5060 @cindex @code{err} directive
5061 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5062 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5063 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5064
5065 @node Error
5066 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5067 @cindex error directive
5068
5069 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5070 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5071 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5072 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5073
5074 @smallexample
5075 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5076 @end smallexample
5077
5078 @node Exitm
5079 @section @code{.exitm}
5080 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5081
5082 @node Extern
5083 @section @code{.extern}
5084
5085 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5086 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5087 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5088 all undefined symbols as external.
5089
5090 @node Fail
5091 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5092
5093 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5094 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5095 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5096 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5097 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5098 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5099
5100 @node File
5101 @section @code{.file}
5102 @cindex @code{file} directive
5103
5104 @ifclear no-file-dir
5105 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5106 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5107 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5108
5109 @subheading Default Version
5110
5111 @cindex logical file name
5112 @cindex file name, logical
5113 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5114 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5115
5116 @smallexample
5117 .file @var{string}
5118 @end smallexample
5119
5120 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5121 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5122 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5123 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5124 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5125
5126 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5127 @end ifclear
5128
5129 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5130 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5131
5132 @smallexample
5133 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5134 @end smallexample
5135
5136 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5137 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5138 literal.
5139
5140 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5141 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5142 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5143 entries will have.
5144
5145 @node Fill
5146 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5147
5148 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5149 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5150 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5151 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5152 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5153 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5154 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5155 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5156 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5157 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5158 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5159 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5160 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5161 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5162
5163 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5164 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5165 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5166 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5167
5168 @node Float
5169 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5170
5171 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5172 @cindex @code{float} directive
5173 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5174 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5175 @ifset GENERIC
5176 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5177 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5178 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5179 @end ifset
5180 @ifclear GENERIC
5181 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5182 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5183 in @sc{ieee} format.
5184 @end ifset
5185 @end ifclear
5186
5187 @node Func
5188 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5189 @cindex @code{func} directive
5190 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5191 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5192 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5193 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5194 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5195 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5196 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5197 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5198
5199 @node Global
5200 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5201
5202 @cindex @code{global} directive
5203 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5204 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5205 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5206 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5207 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5208 from another file linked into the same program.
5209
5210 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5211 compatibility with other assemblers.
5212
5213 @ifset HPPA
5214 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5215 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5216 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5217 @end ifset
5218
5219 @ifset ELF
5220 @node Gnu_attribute
5221 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5222 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5223
5224 @node Hidden
5225 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5226
5227 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5228 @cindex visibility
5229 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5230 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5231 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5232
5233 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5234 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5235 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5236 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5237 @end ifset
5238
5239 @node hword
5240 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5241
5242 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5243 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5244 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5245 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5246 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5247 a 16 bit number for each.
5248
5249 @ifset GENERIC
5250 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5251 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5252 @end ifset
5253 @ifclear GENERIC
5254 @ifset W32
5255 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5256 @end ifset
5257 @ifset W16
5258 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5259 @end ifset
5260 @end ifclear
5261
5262 @node Ident
5263 @section @code{.ident}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5266
5267 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5268 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5269 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5270 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5271 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5272 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5273 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5274
5275 @node If
5276 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5277
5278 @cindex conditional assembly
5279 @cindex @code{if} directive
5280 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5281 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5282 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5283 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5284 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5285 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5286 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5287 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5288
5289 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5290 @table @code
5291 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5292 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5293 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5294 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5295 is considered to be undefined.
5296
5297 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5298 @item .ifb @var{text}
5299 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5300
5301 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5302 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5303 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5304 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5305 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5306 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5307 string comparison is case sensitive.
5308
5309 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5310 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5311 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5312
5313 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5314 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5315 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5316
5317 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5318 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5319 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5320 equal to zero.
5321
5322 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5323 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5324 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5325
5326 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5327 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5328 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5329 to zero.
5330
5331 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5332 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5333 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5334
5335 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5336 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5337 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5338 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5339
5340 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5341 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5342 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5343 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5344
5345 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5346 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5347 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5348 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5349 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5350 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5351 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5352
5353 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5354 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5355 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5356 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5357
5358 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5359 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5360 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5361 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5362 @end table
5363
5364 @node Incbin
5365 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5366
5367 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5368 @cindex binary files, including
5369 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5370 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5371 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5372 around @var{file}.
5373
5374 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5375 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5376 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5377 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5378 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5379
5380 @node Include
5381 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5382
5383 @cindex @code{include} directive
5384 @cindex supporting files, including
5385 @cindex files, including
5386 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5387 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5388 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5389 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5390 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5391 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5392 around @var{file}.
5393
5394 @node Int
5395 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5396
5397 @cindex @code{int} directive
5398 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5399 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5400 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5401 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5402 of target the assembly is for.
5403
5404 @ifclear GENERIC
5405 @ifset H8
5406 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5407 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5408 32-bit integers.
5409 @end ifset
5410 @end ifclear
5411
5412 @ifset ELF
5413 @node Internal
5414 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5415
5416 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5417 @cindex visibility
5418 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5419 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5420 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5421
5422 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5423 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5424 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5425 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5426 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5427 @end ifset
5428
5429 @node Irp
5430 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5431
5432 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5433 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5434 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5435 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5436 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5437 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5438 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5439 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5440
5441 For example, assembling
5442
5443 @example
5444 .irp param,1,2,3
5445 move d\param,sp@@-
5446 .endr
5447 @end example
5448
5449 is equivalent to assembling
5450
5451 @example
5452 move d1,sp@@-
5453 move d2,sp@@-
5454 move d3,sp@@-
5455 @end example
5456
5457 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5458
5459 @node Irpc
5460 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5461
5462 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5463 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5464 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5465 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5466 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5467 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5468 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5469 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5470
5471 For example, assembling
5472
5473 @example
5474 .irpc param,123
5475 move d\param,sp@@-
5476 .endr
5477 @end example
5478
5479 is equivalent to assembling
5480
5481 @example
5482 move d1,sp@@-
5483 move d2,sp@@-
5484 move d3,sp@@-
5485 @end example
5486
5487 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5488 at @xref{Macro}.
5489
5490 @node Lcomm
5491 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5492
5493 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5494 @cindex local common symbols
5495 @cindex symbols, local common
5496 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5497 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5498 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5499 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5500 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5501 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5502
5503 @ifset GENERIC
5504 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5505 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5506 @end ifset
5507
5508 @ifset HPPA
5509 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5510 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5511 @end ifset
5512
5513 @node Lflags
5514 @section @code{.lflags}
5515
5516 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5517 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5518 assemblers, but ignores it.
5519
5520 @ifclear no-line-dir
5521 @node Line
5522 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5523
5524 @cindex @code{line} directive
5525 @cindex logical line number
5526 @ifset aout-bout
5527 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5528 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5529 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5530 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5531 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5532 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5533 @end ifset
5534
5535 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5536 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5537 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5538 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5539 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5540
5541 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5542 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5543 debugging.
5544 @end ifclear
5545
5546 @node Linkonce
5547 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5548 @cindex COMDAT
5549 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5550 @cindex common sections
5551 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5552 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5553 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5554 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5555 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5556 unique.
5557
5558 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5559 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5560 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5561
5562 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5563 following strings. For example:
5564 @smallexample
5565 .linkonce same_size
5566 @end smallexample
5567 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5568
5569 @table @code
5570 @item discard
5571 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5572
5573 @item one_only
5574 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5575
5576 @item same_size
5577 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5578
5579 @item same_contents
5580 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5581 @end table
5582
5583 @node List
5584 @section @code{.list}
5585
5586 @cindex @code{list} directive
5587 @cindex listing control, turning on
5588 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5589 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5590 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5591 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5592 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5593
5594 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5595 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5596 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5597
5598 @node Ln
5599 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5600
5601 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5602 @ifclear no-line-dir
5603 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5604 @end ifclear
5605 @ifset no-line-dir
5606 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5607 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5608 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5609 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5610 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5611 @ifset BOUT
5612
5613 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5614 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5615 output format.
5616 @end ifset
5617 @end ifset
5618
5619 @node Loc
5620 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5621 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5622 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5623 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5624 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5625 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5626 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5627 the row is added.
5628
5629 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5630
5631 @table @code
5632 @item basic_block
5633 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5634 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5635
5636 @item prologue_end
5637 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5638 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5639
5640 @item epilogue_begin
5641 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5642 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5643
5644 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5645 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5646 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5647 either 0 or 1.
5648
5649 @item isa @var{value}
5650 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5651 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5652
5653 @item discriminator @var{value}
5654 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5655 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5656
5657 @end table
5658
5659 @node Loc_mark_labels
5660 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5661 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5662 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5663 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5664 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5665 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5666 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5667 this function respectively.
5668
5669 @ifset ELF
5670 @node Local
5671 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5672
5673 @cindex @code{local} directive
5674 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5675 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5676 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5677 they will be created.
5678
5679 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5680 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5681 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5682 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5683 @end ifset
5684
5685 @node Long
5686 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5687
5688 @cindex @code{long} directive
5689 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5690
5691 @ignore
5692 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5693 @c what it really ought to do
5694 @node Lsym
5695 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5696
5697 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5698 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5699 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5700 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5701 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5702 the same as the expression value:
5703 @smallexample
5704 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5705 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5706 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5707 @end smallexample
5708 @noindent
5709 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5710 @end ignore
5711
5712 @node Macro
5713 @section @code{.macro}
5714
5715 @cindex macros
5716 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5717 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5718 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5719
5720 @example
5721 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5722 .long \from
5723 .if \to-\from
5724 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5725 .endif
5726 .endm
5727 @end example
5728
5729 @noindent
5730 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5731
5732 @example
5733 .long 0
5734 .long 1
5735 .long 2
5736 .long 3
5737 .long 4
5738 .long 5
5739 @end example
5740
5741 @ftable @code
5742 @item .macro @var{macname}
5743 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5744 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5745 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5746 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5747 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5748 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5749 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5750 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5751 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5752 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5753 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5754 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5755
5756 @table @code
5757 @item .macro comm
5758 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5759 arguments.
5760
5761 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5762 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5763 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5764 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5765 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5766
5767 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5768 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5769 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5770 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5771 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5772 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5773 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5774 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5775
5776 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5777 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5778 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5779 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5780 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5781
5782 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5783 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5784 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5785
5786 @end table
5787
5788 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5789 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5790 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5791 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5792 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5793 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5794 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5795 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5796 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5797 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5798 this macro definition:
5799
5800 @example
5801 .macro label l
5802 \l:
5803 .endm
5804 @end example
5805
5806 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5807 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5808 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5809 identifier.
5810
5811 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5812 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5813 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5814 length specifier like this:
5815
5816 @example
5817 .macro opcode base length
5818 \base.\length
5819 .endm
5820 @end example
5821
5822 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5823 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5824 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5825
5826 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5827
5828 @table @code
5829 @item Insert white space
5830 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5831 solution. eg:
5832
5833 @example
5834 .macro label l
5835 \l :
5836 .endm
5837 @end example
5838
5839 @item Use @samp{\()}
5840 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5841 the following text. eg:
5842
5843 @example
5844 .macro opcode base length
5845 \base\().\length
5846 .endm
5847 @end example
5848
5849 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5850 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5851 used as a separator. eg:
5852
5853 @example
5854 .altmacro
5855 .macro label l
5856 l&:
5857 .endm
5858 @end example
5859 @end table
5860
5861 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5862 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5863 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5864
5865 @item .endm
5866 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5867 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5868
5869 @item .exitm
5870 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5871 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5872
5873 @cindex number of macros executed
5874 @cindex macros, count executed
5875 @item \@@
5876 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5877 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5878 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5879
5880 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5881 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5882 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5883 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5884 @end ftable
5885
5886 @node MRI
5887 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5888
5889 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5890 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5891 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5892 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5893 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5894 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5895
5896 @node Noaltmacro
5897 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5898 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5899
5900 @node Nolist
5901 @section @code{.nolist}
5902
5903 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5904 @cindex listing control, turning off
5905 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5906 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5907 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5908 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5909 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5910
5911 @node Octa
5912 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5913
5914 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5915 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5916 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5917 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5918 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5919 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5920
5921 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5922 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5923
5924 @node Offset
5925 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5926
5927 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5928 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5929 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5930 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5931 directive.
5932
5933 @node Org
5934 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5935
5936 @cindex @code{org} directive
5937 @cindex location counter, advancing
5938 @cindex advancing location counter
5939 @cindex current address, advancing
5940 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5941 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5942 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5943 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5944 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5945 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5946 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5947 is the same as the current subsection.
5948
5949 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5950 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5951 backwards.
5952
5953 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5954 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5955 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5956 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5957 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5958 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5959
5960 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5961 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5962 people's assemblers.
5963
5964 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5965 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5966 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5967 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5968
5969 @node P2align
5970 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5971
5972 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5973 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5974 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5975 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5976 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5977 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5978 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5979 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5980
5981 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5982 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5983 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5984 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5985 with no-op instructions.
5986
5987 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5988 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5989 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5990 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5991 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5992 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5993 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5994
5995 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5996 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5997 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5998 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5999 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6000 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6001 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6002 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6003 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6004 undefined.
6005
6006 @ifset ELF
6007 @node PopSection
6008 @section @code{.popsection}
6009
6010 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6011 @cindex Section Stack
6012 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6013 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6014 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6015 (@pxref{Previous}).
6016
6017 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6018 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6019 stack.
6020 @end ifset
6021
6022 @ifset ELF
6023 @node Previous
6024 @section @code{.previous}
6025
6026 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6027 @cindex Section Stack
6028 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6029 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6030 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6031 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6032
6033 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6034 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6035 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6036 subsections). For example:
6037
6038 @smallexample
6039 .section A
6040 .subsection 1
6041 .word 0x1234
6042 .subsection 2
6043 .word 0x5678
6044 .previous
6045 .word 0x9abc
6046 @end smallexample
6047
6048 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6049 section A. Whilst:
6050
6051 @smallexample
6052 .section A
6053 .subsection 1
6054 # Now in section A subsection 1
6055 .word 0x1234
6056 .section B
6057 .subsection 0
6058 # Now in section B subsection 0
6059 .word 0x5678
6060 .subsection 1
6061 # Now in section B subsection 1
6062 .word 0x9abc
6063 .previous
6064 # Now in section B subsection 0
6065 .word 0xdef0
6066 @end smallexample
6067
6068 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6069 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6070
6071 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6072 the top section on the section stack.
6073 @end ifset
6074
6075 @node Print
6076 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6077
6078 @cindex @code{print} directive
6079 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6080 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6081
6082 @ifset ELF
6083 @node Protected
6084 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6085
6086 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6087 @cindex visibility
6088 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6089 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6090
6091 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6092 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6093 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6094 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6095 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6096 this.
6097 @end ifset
6098
6099 @node Psize
6100 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6101
6102 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6103 @cindex listing control: paper size
6104 @cindex paper size, for listings
6105 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6106 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6107
6108 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6109 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6110 default width is 200 columns.
6111
6112 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6113 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6114 @code{.eject}).
6115
6116 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6117 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6118
6119 @node Purgem
6120 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6121
6122 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6123 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6124 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6125
6126 @ifset ELF
6127 @node PushSection
6128 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6129
6130 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6131 @cindex Section Stack
6132 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6133 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6134 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6135 (@pxref{Previous}).
6136
6137 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6138 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6139 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6140 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6141 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6142 @end ifset
6143
6144 @node Quad
6145 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6146
6147 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6148 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6149 each bignum, it emits
6150 @ifclear bignum-16
6151 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6152 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6153 @cindex eight-byte integer
6154 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6155
6156 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6157 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6158 @end ifclear
6159 @ifset bignum-16
6160 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6161 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6162 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6163 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6164 @end ifset
6165
6166 @node Reloc
6167 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6168
6169 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6170 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6171 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6172 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6173 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6174 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6175 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6176 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6177 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6178 section.
6179
6180 @node Rept
6181 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6182
6183 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6184 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6185 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6186
6187 For example, assembling
6188
6189 @example
6190 .rept 3
6191 .long 0
6192 .endr
6193 @end example
6194
6195 is equivalent to assembling
6196
6197 @example
6198 .long 0
6199 .long 0
6200 .long 0
6201 @end example
6202
6203 @node Sbttl
6204 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6205
6206 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6207 @cindex subtitles for listings
6208 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6209 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6210 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6211
6212 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6213 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6214
6215 @ifset COFF
6216 @node Scl
6217 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6218
6219 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6220 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6221 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6222 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6223 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6224 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6225 symbolic debugging information.
6226 @ifset BOUT
6227
6228 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6229 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6230 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6231 @end ifset
6232 @end ifset
6233
6234 @ifset COFF-ELF
6235 @node Section
6236 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6237
6238 @cindex named section
6239 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6240 named @var{name}.
6241
6242 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6243 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6244 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6245
6246 @ifset COFF
6247 @ifset ELF
6248 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6249 @subheading COFF Version
6250 @end ifset
6251
6252 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6253 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6254 ways:
6255
6256 @smallexample
6257 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6258 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6259 @end smallexample
6260
6261 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6262 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6263 @table @code
6264 @item b
6265 bss section (uninitialized data)
6266 @item n
6267 section is not loaded
6268 @item w
6269 writable section
6270 @item d
6271 data section
6272 @item e
6273 exclude section from linking
6274 @item r
6275 read-only section
6276 @item x
6277 executable section
6278 @item s
6279 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6280 @item a
6281 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6282 @item y
6283 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6284 @item 0-9
6285 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6286 @end table
6287
6288 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6289 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6290 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6291 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6292 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6293
6294 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6295 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6296 @end ifset
6297
6298 @ifset ELF
6299 @ifset COFF
6300 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6301 @subheading ELF Version
6302 @end ifset
6303
6304 @cindex Section Stack
6305 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6306 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6307 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6308 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6309
6310 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6311 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6312
6313 @smallexample
6314 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6315 @end smallexample
6316
6317 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6318 @kindex --sectname-subst
6319 @cindex section name substitution
6320 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6321 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6322 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6323
6324 @smallexample
6325 .macro exception_code
6326 .section %S.exception
6327 [exception code here]
6328 .previous
6329 .endm
6330
6331 .text
6332 [code]
6333 exception_code
6334 [...]
6335
6336 .section .init
6337 [init code]
6338 exception_code
6339 [...]
6340 @end smallexample
6341
6342 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6343 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6344 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6345 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6346 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6347 macros just for that purpose.
6348
6349 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6350 combination of the following characters:
6351 @table @code
6352 @item a
6353 section is allocatable
6354 @item e
6355 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6356 @item w
6357 section is writable
6358 @item x
6359 section is executable
6360 @item M
6361 section is mergeable
6362 @item S
6363 section contains zero terminated strings
6364 @item G
6365 section is a member of a section group
6366 @item T
6367 section is used for thread-local-storage
6368 @item ?
6369 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6370 @end table
6371
6372 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6373 @table @code
6374 @item @@progbits
6375 section contains data
6376 @item @@nobits
6377 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6378 @item @@note
6379 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6380 @item @@init_array
6381 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6382 @item @@fini_array
6383 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6384 @item @@preinit_array
6385 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6386 @end table
6387
6388 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6389
6390 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6391 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6392 @code{%} character.
6393
6394 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6395 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6396
6397 @smallexample
6398 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6399 @end smallexample
6400
6401 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6402 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6403 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6404 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6405 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6406 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6407 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6408 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6409 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6410
6411 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6412 be present along with an additional field like this:
6413
6414 @smallexample
6415 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6416 @end smallexample
6417
6418 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6419 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6420 @table @code
6421 @item comdat
6422 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6423 @item .gnu.linkonce
6424 an alias for comdat
6425 @end table
6426
6427 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6428 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6429
6430 @smallexample
6431 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6432 @end smallexample
6433
6434 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6435 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6436 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6437 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6438 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6439 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6440
6441 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6442 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6443 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6444 executable. The section will contain data.
6445
6446 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6447 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6448
6449 @smallexample
6450 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6451 @end smallexample
6452
6453 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6454 separated flags:
6455 @table @code
6456 @item #alloc
6457 section is allocatable
6458 @item #write
6459 section is writable
6460 @item #execinstr
6461 section is executable
6462 @item #exclude
6463 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6464 @item #tls
6465 section is used for thread local storage
6466 @end table
6467
6468 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6469 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6470 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6471 work.
6472 @end ifset
6473 @end ifset
6474
6475 @node Set
6476 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6477
6478 @cindex @code{set} directive
6479 @cindex symbol value, setting
6480 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6481 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6482 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6483 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6484
6485 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6486 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6487 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6488 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6489 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6490 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6491 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6492 different symbols.
6493
6494 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6495 file is the last value stored into it.
6496
6497 @ifset Z80
6498 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6499 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6500 @end ifset
6501
6502 @node Short
6503 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6504
6505 @cindex @code{short} directive
6506 @ifset GENERIC
6507 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6508 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6509
6510 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6511 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6512 @end ifset
6513 @ifclear GENERIC
6514 @ifset W16
6515 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6516 @end ifset
6517 @ifset W32
6518 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6519 a 16 bit number for each.
6520 @end ifset
6521 @end ifclear
6522
6523 @node Single
6524 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6525
6526 @cindex @code{single} directive
6527 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6528 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6529 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6530 @ifset GENERIC
6531 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6532 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6533 @end ifset
6534 @ifclear GENERIC
6535 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6536 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6537 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6538 @end ifset
6539 @end ifclear
6540
6541 @ifset COFF-ELF
6542 @node Size
6543 @section @code{.size}
6544
6545 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6546
6547 @ifset COFF
6548 @ifset ELF
6549 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6550 @subheading COFF Version
6551 @end ifset
6552
6553 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6554 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6555 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6556
6557 @smallexample
6558 .size @var{expression}
6559 @end smallexample
6560
6561 @ifset BOUT
6562 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6563 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6564 ignores it.
6565 @end ifset
6566 @end ifset
6567
6568 @ifset ELF
6569 @ifset COFF
6570 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6571 @subheading ELF Version
6572 @end ifset
6573
6574 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6575 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6576
6577 @smallexample
6578 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6579 @end smallexample
6580
6581 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6582 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6583 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6584 symbols.
6585 @end ifset
6586 @end ifset
6587
6588 @ifclear no-space-dir
6589 @node Skip
6590 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6591
6592 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6593 @cindex filling memory
6594 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6595 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6596 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6597 @samp{.space}.
6598 @end ifclear
6599
6600 @node Sleb128
6601 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6602
6603 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6604 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6605 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6606 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6607
6608 @ifclear no-space-dir
6609 @node Space
6610 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6611
6612 @cindex @code{space} directive
6613 @cindex filling memory
6614 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6615 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6616 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6617 as @samp{.skip}.
6618
6619 @ifset HPPA
6620 @quotation
6621 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6622 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6623 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6624 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6625 for a summary.
6626 @end quotation
6627 @end ifset
6628 @end ifclear
6629
6630 @ifset have-stabs
6631 @node Stab
6632 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6633
6634 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6635 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6636 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6637 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6638 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6639 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6640 Up to five fields are required:
6641
6642 @table @var
6643 @item string
6644 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6645 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6646 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6647 using this field.
6648
6649 @item type
6650 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6651 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6652 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6653
6654 @item other
6655 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6656 low 8 bits of this expression.
6657
6658 @item desc
6659 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6660 bits of this expression.
6661
6662 @item value
6663 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6664 @end table
6665
6666 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6667 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6668 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6669 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6670
6671 @table @code
6672 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6673 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6674
6675 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6676 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6677 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6678 strings.
6679
6680 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6681 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6682 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6683 assembled.
6684
6685 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6686 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6687 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6688
6689 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6690 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6691 All five fields are specified.
6692 @end table
6693 @end ifset
6694 @c end have-stabs
6695
6696 @node String
6697 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6698 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6699
6700 @cindex string, copying to object file
6701 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6702 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6703 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6704 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6705 @cindex @code{string} directive
6706 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6707 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6708 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6709 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6710
6711 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6712 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6713 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6714 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6715
6716 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6717 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6718 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6719 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6720
6721 Example:
6722 @smallexample
6723 .string32 "BYE"
6724 expands to:
6725 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6726 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6727 @end smallexample
6728
6729
6730 @node Struct
6731 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6732
6733 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6734 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6735 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6736 @smallexample
6737 .struct 0
6738 field1:
6739 .struct field1 + 4
6740 field2:
6741 .struct field2 + 4
6742 field3:
6743 @end smallexample
6744 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6745 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6746 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6747 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6748 before further assembly.
6749
6750 @ifset ELF
6751 @node SubSection
6752 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6753
6754 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6755 @cindex Section Stack
6756 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6757 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6758 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6759 (@pxref{Previous}).
6760
6761 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6762 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6763 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6764 @end ifset
6765
6766 @ifset ELF
6767 @node Symver
6768 @section @code{.symver}
6769 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6770 @cindex symbol versioning
6771 @cindex versions of symbols
6772 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6773 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6774 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6775 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6776 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6777 shared library.
6778
6779 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6780 @smallexample
6781 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6782 @end smallexample
6783 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6784 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6785 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6786 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6787 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6788 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6789 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6790 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6791 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6792 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6793 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6794 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6795 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6796 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6797
6798 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6799 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6800 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6801 symbol table.
6802
6803 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6804 @smallexample
6805 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6806 @end smallexample
6807 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6808 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6809 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6810 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6811
6812 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6813 @smallexample
6814 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6815 @end smallexample
6816 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6817 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6818 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6819 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6820 @end ifset
6821
6822 @ifset COFF
6823 @node Tag
6824 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6825
6826 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6827 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6828 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6829 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6830 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6831 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6832 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6833 @ifset BOUT
6834
6835 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6836 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6837 ignores it.
6838 @end ifset
6839 @end ifset
6840
6841 @node Text
6842 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6843
6844 @cindex @code{text} directive
6845 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6846 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6847 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6848 is used.
6849
6850 @node Title
6851 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6852
6853 @cindex @code{title} directive
6854 @cindex listing control: title line
6855 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6856 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6857
6858 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6859 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6860
6861 @ifset COFF-ELF
6862 @node Type
6863 @section @code{.type}
6864
6865 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6866
6867 @ifset COFF
6868 @ifset ELF
6869 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6870 @subheading COFF Version
6871 @end ifset
6872
6873 @cindex COFF symbol type
6874 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6875 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6876 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6877 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6878
6879 @smallexample
6880 .type @var{int}
6881 @end smallexample
6882
6883 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6884 entry.
6885
6886 @ifset BOUT
6887 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6888 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6889 directive but ignores it.
6890 @end ifset
6891 @end ifset
6892
6893 @ifset ELF
6894 @ifset COFF
6895 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6896 @subheading ELF Version
6897 @end ifset
6898
6899 @cindex ELF symbol type
6900 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6901 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6902 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6903
6904 @smallexample
6905 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6906 @end smallexample
6907
6908 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6909 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6910 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6911 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6912
6913 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6914 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6915 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6916 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6917 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6918 assemblers.
6919
6920 The syntaxes supported are:
6921
6922 @smallexample
6923 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6924 .type <name>,#<type>
6925 .type <name>,@@<type>
6926 .type <name>,%<type>
6927 .type <name>,"<type>"
6928 @end smallexample
6929
6930 The types supported are:
6931
6932 @table @gcctabopt
6933 @item STT_FUNC
6934 @itemx function
6935 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6936
6937 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6938 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6939 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6940 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6941
6942 @item STT_OBJECT
6943 @itemx object
6944 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6945
6946 @item STT_TLS
6947 @itemx tls_object
6948 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6949
6950 @item STT_COMMON
6951 @itemx common
6952 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6953
6954 @item STT_NOTYPE
6955 @itemx notype
6956 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6957
6958 @item gnu_unique_object
6959 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6960 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6961 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6962 systems).
6963
6964 @end table
6965
6966 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6967
6968 @end ifset
6969 @end ifset
6970
6971 @node Uleb128
6972 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6973
6974 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6975 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6976 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6977 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6978
6979 @ifset COFF
6980 @node Val
6981 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6982
6983 @cindex @code{val} directive
6984 @cindex COFF value attribute
6985 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6986 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6987 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6988 entry.
6989 @ifset BOUT
6990
6991 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6992 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6993 @end ifset
6994 @end ifset
6995
6996 @ifset ELF
6997 @node Version
6998 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6999
7000 @cindex @code{version} directive
7001 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7002 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7003 @end ifset
7004
7005 @ifset ELF
7006 @node VTableEntry
7007 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7008
7009 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7010 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7011 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7012
7013 @node VTableInherit
7014 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7015
7016 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7017 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7018 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7019 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7020 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7021 @end ifset
7022
7023 @node Warning
7024 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7025 @cindex warning directive
7026 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7027 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7028
7029 @node Weak
7030 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7031
7032 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7033 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7034 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7035
7036 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7037 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7038 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7039
7040 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7041 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7042 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7043
7044 @node Weakref
7045 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7046
7047 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7048 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7049 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7050 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7051 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7052 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7053
7054 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7055 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7056 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7057 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7058 had the references to the alias removed.
7059
7060 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7061 within the assembler.
7062
7063 @node Word
7064 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7065
7066 @cindex @code{word} directive
7067 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7068 separated by commas.
7069 @ifclear GENERIC
7070 @ifset W32
7071 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7072 @end ifset
7073 @ifset W16
7074 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7075 @end ifset
7076 @end ifclear
7077 @ifset GENERIC
7078
7079 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7080 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7081 @end ifset
7082
7083 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7084 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7085 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7086 @cindex difference tables altered
7087 @cindex altered difference tables
7088 @quotation
7089 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7090 @end quotation
7091
7092 @ifset GENERIC
7093 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7094 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7095 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7096 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7097
7098 @end ifset
7099 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7100 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7101 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7102 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7103 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7104 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7105 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7106 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7107 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7108 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7109 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7110 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7111 @code{sym2}.
7112
7113 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7114 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7115 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7116 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7117 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7118 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7119 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7120
7121 @ifset INTERNALS
7122 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7123 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7124 assembly language programmers.
7125 @end ifset
7126 @end ifset
7127 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7128
7129 @ifclear no-space-dir
7130 @node Zero
7131 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7132
7133 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7134 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7135 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7136 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7137 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7138 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7139 @end ifclear
7140
7141 @node Deprecated
7142 @section Deprecated Directives
7143
7144 @cindex deprecated directives
7145 @cindex obsolescent directives
7146 One day these directives won't work.
7147 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7148 @table @t
7149 @item .abort
7150 @item .line
7151 @end table
7152
7153 @ifset ELF
7154 @node Object Attributes
7155 @chapter Object Attributes
7156 @cindex object attributes
7157
7158 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7159 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7160 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7161 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7162 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7163 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7164 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7165 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7166 newer generation at run-time.
7167
7168 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7169 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7170 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7171 correctly.
7172
7173 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7174 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7175 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7176 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7177 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7178 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7179
7180 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7181 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7182
7183 @menu
7184 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7185 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7186 @end menu
7187
7188 @node GNU Object Attributes
7189 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7190
7191 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7192 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7193
7194 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7195 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7196 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7197 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7198 architecture-dependent ones.
7199
7200 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7201
7202 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7203
7204 @table @r
7205 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7206 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7207 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7208 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7209 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7210 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7211 @end table
7212
7213 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7214
7215 @table @r
7216 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7217 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7218
7219 @itemize @bullet
7220 @item
7221 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7222 @item
7223 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7224 double-precision FPU.
7225 @item
7226 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7227 @item
7228 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7229 @item
7230 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7231 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7232 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7233 @item
7234 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7235 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7236 general-purpose registers.
7237 @item
7238 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7239 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7240 @item
7241 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7242 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7243 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7244 @end itemize
7245 @end table
7246
7247 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7248
7249 @table @r
7250 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7251 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7252
7253 @itemize @bullet
7254 @item
7255 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7256 @item
7257 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7258 @item
7259 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7260 @item
7261 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7262 @end itemize
7263
7264 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7265 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7266
7267 @itemize @bullet
7268 @item
7269 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7270 @item
7271 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7272 @item
7273 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7274 @item
7275 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7276 @end itemize
7277 @end table
7278
7279 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7280
7281 @table @r
7282 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7283 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7284
7285 @itemize @bullet
7286 @item
7287 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7288 @item
7289 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7290 @item
7291 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7292 @end itemize
7293 @end table
7294
7295 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7296 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7297
7298 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7299 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7300 mailing list.
7301
7302 @itemize @bullet
7303 @item
7304 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7305 @item
7306 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7307 @item
7308 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7309 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7310 @item
7311 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7312 @item
7313 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7314 @item
7315 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7316 @end itemize
7317
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset GENERIC
7321 @node Machine Dependencies
7322 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7323
7324 @cindex machine dependencies
7325 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7326 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7327 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7328 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7329 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7330 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7331 optimization.
7332
7333 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7334 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7335 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7336
7337 @menu
7338 @ifset AARCH64
7339 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7340 @end ifset
7341 @ifset ALPHA
7342 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7343 @end ifset
7344 @ifset ARC
7345 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7346 @end ifset
7347 @ifset ARM
7348 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7349 @end ifset
7350 @ifset AVR
7351 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7352 @end ifset
7353 @ifset Blackfin
7354 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7355 @end ifset
7356 @ifset CR16
7357 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7358 @end ifset
7359 @ifset CRIS
7360 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7361 @end ifset
7362 @ifset D10V
7363 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7364 @end ifset
7365 @ifset D30V
7366 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7367 @end ifset
7368 @ifset EPIPHANY
7369 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7370 @end ifset
7371 @ifset H8/300
7372 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7373 @end ifset
7374 @ifset HPPA
7375 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7376 @end ifset
7377 @ifset I370
7378 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7379 @end ifset
7380 @ifset I80386
7381 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7382 @end ifset
7383 @ifset I860
7384 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7385 @end ifset
7386 @ifset I960
7387 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7388 @end ifset
7389 @ifset IA64
7390 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7391 @end ifset
7392 @ifset IP2K
7393 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7394 @end ifset
7395 @ifset LM32
7396 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7397 @end ifset
7398 @ifset M32C
7399 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7400 @end ifset
7401 @ifset M32R
7402 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7403 @end ifset
7404 @ifset M680X0
7405 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7406 @end ifset
7407 @ifset M68HC11
7408 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7409 @end ifset
7410 @ifset METAG
7411 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7412 @end ifset
7413 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7414 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7415 @end ifset
7416 @ifset MIPS
7417 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7418 @end ifset
7419 @ifset MMIX
7420 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7421 @end ifset
7422 @ifset MSP430
7423 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7424 @end ifset
7425 @ifset NDS32
7426 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7427 @end ifset
7428 @ifset NIOSII
7429 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7430 @end ifset
7431 @ifset NS32K
7432 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7433 @end ifset
7434 @ifset PDP11
7435 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7436 @end ifset
7437 @ifset PJ
7438 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7439 @end ifset
7440 @ifset PPC
7441 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7442 @end ifset
7443 @ifset RL78
7444 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7445 @end ifset
7446 @ifset RX
7447 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7448 @end ifset
7449 @ifset S390
7450 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7451 @end ifset
7452 @ifset SCORE
7453 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7454 @end ifset
7455 @ifset SH
7456 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7457 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7458 @end ifset
7459 @ifset SPARC
7460 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7461 @end ifset
7462 @ifset TIC54X
7463 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7464 @end ifset
7465 @ifset TIC6X
7466 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7467 @end ifset
7468 @ifset TILEGX
7469 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7470 @end ifset
7471 @ifset TILEPRO
7472 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7473 @end ifset
7474 @ifset V850
7475 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7476 @end ifset
7477 @ifset VAX
7478 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7479 @end ifset
7480 @ifset VISIUM
7481 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7482 @end ifset
7483 @ifset XGATE
7484 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7485 @end ifset
7486 @ifset XSTORMY16
7487 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7488 @end ifset
7489 @ifset XTENSA
7490 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7491 @end ifset
7492 @ifset Z80
7493 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7494 @end ifset
7495 @ifset Z8000
7496 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7497 @end ifset
7498 @end menu
7499
7500 @lowersections
7501 @end ifset
7502
7503 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7504 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7505 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7506 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7507 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7508 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7509 @c in both conditional blocks.
7510
7511 @ifset AARCH64
7512 @include c-aarch64.texi
7513 @end ifset
7514
7515 @ifset ALPHA
7516 @include c-alpha.texi
7517 @end ifset
7518
7519 @ifset ARC
7520 @include c-arc.texi
7521 @end ifset
7522
7523 @ifset ARM
7524 @include c-arm.texi
7525 @end ifset
7526
7527 @ifset AVR
7528 @include c-avr.texi
7529 @end ifset
7530
7531 @ifset Blackfin
7532 @include c-bfin.texi
7533 @end ifset
7534
7535 @ifset CR16
7536 @include c-cr16.texi
7537 @end ifset
7538
7539 @ifset CRIS
7540 @include c-cris.texi
7541 @end ifset
7542
7543 @ifset Renesas-all
7544 @ifclear GENERIC
7545 @node Machine Dependencies
7546 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7547
7548 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7549 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7550 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7551 family.
7552
7553 @menu
7554 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7555 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7556 @end menu
7557 @lowersections
7558 @end ifclear
7559 @end ifset
7560
7561 @ifset D10V
7562 @include c-d10v.texi
7563 @end ifset
7564
7565 @ifset D30V
7566 @include c-d30v.texi
7567 @end ifset
7568
7569 @ifset EPIPHANY
7570 @include c-epiphany.texi
7571 @end ifset
7572
7573 @ifset H8/300
7574 @include c-h8300.texi
7575 @end ifset
7576
7577 @ifset HPPA
7578 @include c-hppa.texi
7579 @end ifset
7580
7581 @ifset I370
7582 @include c-i370.texi
7583 @end ifset
7584
7585 @ifset I80386
7586 @include c-i386.texi
7587 @end ifset
7588
7589 @ifset I860
7590 @include c-i860.texi
7591 @end ifset
7592
7593 @ifset I960
7594 @include c-i960.texi
7595 @end ifset
7596
7597 @ifset IA64
7598 @include c-ia64.texi
7599 @end ifset
7600
7601 @ifset IP2K
7602 @include c-ip2k.texi
7603 @end ifset
7604
7605 @ifset LM32
7606 @include c-lm32.texi
7607 @end ifset
7608
7609 @ifset M32C
7610 @include c-m32c.texi
7611 @end ifset
7612
7613 @ifset M32R
7614 @include c-m32r.texi
7615 @end ifset
7616
7617 @ifset M680X0
7618 @include c-m68k.texi
7619 @end ifset
7620
7621 @ifset M68HC11
7622 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7623 @end ifset
7624
7625 @ifset METAG
7626 @include c-metag.texi
7627 @end ifset
7628
7629 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7630 @include c-microblaze.texi
7631 @end ifset
7632
7633 @ifset MIPS
7634 @include c-mips.texi
7635 @end ifset
7636
7637 @ifset MMIX
7638 @include c-mmix.texi
7639 @end ifset
7640
7641 @ifset MSP430
7642 @include c-msp430.texi
7643 @end ifset
7644
7645 @ifset NDS32
7646 @include c-nds32.texi
7647 @end ifset
7648
7649 @ifset NIOSII
7650 @include c-nios2.texi
7651 @end ifset
7652
7653 @ifset NS32K
7654 @include c-ns32k.texi
7655 @end ifset
7656
7657 @ifset PDP11
7658 @include c-pdp11.texi
7659 @end ifset
7660
7661 @ifset PJ
7662 @include c-pj.texi
7663 @end ifset
7664
7665 @ifset PPC
7666 @include c-ppc.texi
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @ifset RL78
7670 @include c-rl78.texi
7671 @end ifset
7672
7673 @ifset RX
7674 @include c-rx.texi
7675 @end ifset
7676
7677 @ifset S390
7678 @include c-s390.texi
7679 @end ifset
7680
7681 @ifset SCORE
7682 @include c-score.texi
7683 @end ifset
7684
7685 @ifset SH
7686 @include c-sh.texi
7687 @include c-sh64.texi
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset SPARC
7691 @include c-sparc.texi
7692 @end ifset
7693
7694 @ifset TIC54X
7695 @include c-tic54x.texi
7696 @end ifset
7697
7698 @ifset TIC6X
7699 @include c-tic6x.texi
7700 @end ifset
7701
7702 @ifset TILEGX
7703 @include c-tilegx.texi
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @ifset TILEPRO
7707 @include c-tilepro.texi
7708 @end ifset
7709
7710 @ifset V850
7711 @include c-v850.texi
7712 @end ifset
7713
7714 @ifset VAX
7715 @include c-vax.texi
7716 @end ifset
7717
7718 @ifset VISIUM
7719 @include c-visium.texi
7720 @end ifset
7721
7722 @ifset XGATE
7723 @include c-xgate.texi
7724 @end ifset
7725
7726 @ifset XSTORMY16
7727 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7728 @end ifset
7729
7730 @ifset XTENSA
7731 @include c-xtensa.texi
7732 @end ifset
7733
7734 @ifset Z80
7735 @include c-z80.texi
7736 @end ifset
7737
7738 @ifset Z8000
7739 @include c-z8k.texi
7740 @end ifset
7741
7742 @ifset GENERIC
7743 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7744 @raisesections
7745 @end ifset
7746
7747 @node Reporting Bugs
7748 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7749 @cindex bugs in assembler
7750 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7751
7752 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7753
7754 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7755 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7756 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7757 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7758
7759 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7760 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7761
7762 @menu
7763 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7764 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7765 @end menu
7766
7767 @node Bug Criteria
7768 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7769 @cindex bug criteria
7770
7771 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7772
7773 @itemize @bullet
7774 @cindex fatal signal
7775 @cindex assembler crash
7776 @cindex crash of assembler
7777 @item
7778 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7779 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7780
7781 @cindex error on valid input
7782 @item
7783 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7784
7785 @cindex invalid input
7786 @item
7787 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7788 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7789 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7790
7791 @item
7792 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7793 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7794 @end itemize
7795
7796 @node Bug Reporting
7797 @section How to Report Bugs
7798 @cindex bug reports
7799 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7800
7801 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7802 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7803 contact that organization first.
7804
7805 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7806 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7807 distribution.
7808
7809 @ifset BUGURL
7810 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7811 to @value{BUGURL}.
7812 @end ifset
7813
7814 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7815 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7816 fact or leave it out, state it!
7817
7818 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7819 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7820 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7821 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7822 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7823 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7824 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7825 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7826 and the most helpful.
7827
7828 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7829 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7830 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7831
7832 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7833 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7834 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7835 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7836
7837 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7838
7839 @itemize @bullet
7840 @item
7841 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7842 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7843
7844 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7845 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7846
7847 @item
7848 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7849
7850 @item
7851 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7852 version number.
7853
7854 @item
7855 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7856 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7857
7858 @item
7859 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7860 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7861 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7862
7863 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7864 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7865
7866 @item
7867 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7868 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7869 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7870 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7871 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7872 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7873 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7874
7875 @item
7876 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7877 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7878
7879 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7880 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7881 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7882 make a mistake.
7883
7884 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7885 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7886 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7887 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7888 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7889 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7890 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7891 observations.
7892
7893 @item
7894 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7895 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7896 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7897 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7898 by line number.
7899
7900 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7901 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7902 @end itemize
7903
7904 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7905
7906 @itemize @bullet
7907 @item
7908 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7909
7910 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7911 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7912 changes will not affect it.
7913
7914 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7915 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7916 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7917 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7918
7919 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7920 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7921 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7922 less time, and so on.
7923
7924 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7925 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7926
7927 @item
7928 A patch for the bug.
7929
7930 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7931 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7932 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7933 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7934
7935 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7936 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7937 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7938 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7939
7940 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7941 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7942 help us to understand.
7943
7944 @item
7945 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7946
7947 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7948 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7949 @end itemize
7950
7951 @node Acknowledgements
7952 @chapter Acknowledgements
7953
7954 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7955 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7956 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7957 @c (October 2012),
7958 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7959
7960 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7961 more details?}
7962
7963 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7964 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7965 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7966
7967 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7968 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7969 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7970 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7971 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7972 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7973 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7974 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7975 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7976 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7977
7978 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7979 in format-specific I/O modules.
7980
7981 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7982 has done much work with it since.
7983
7984 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7985
7986 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7987
7988 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7989 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7990
7991 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7992 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7993 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7994 support a.out format.
7995
7996 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7997 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7998 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7999 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8000 targets.
8001
8002 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8003 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8004 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8005 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8006 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8007 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8008 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8009
8010 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8011 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8012 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8013 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8014
8015 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8016
8017 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8018
8019 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8020 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8021 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8022 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8023
8024 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8025 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8026 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8027 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8028 and some initial 64-bit support).
8029
8030 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8031
8032 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8033 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8034
8035 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8036 flavors.
8037
8038 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8039 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8040
8041 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8042 configuration enhancements.
8043
8044 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8045
8046 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8047 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8048 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8049 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8050
8051 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8052 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8053 @include fdl.texi
8054
8055 @node AS Index
8056 @unnumbered AS Index
8057
8058 @printindex cp
8059
8060 @bye
8061 @c Local Variables:
8062 @c fill-column: 79
8063 @c End:
This page took 0.245117 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.